WO2020211735A1 - Method for using enhanced function of electronic device and related apparatus - Google Patents

Method for using enhanced function of electronic device and related apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020211735A1
WO2020211735A1 PCT/CN2020/084594 CN2020084594W WO2020211735A1 WO 2020211735 A1 WO2020211735 A1 WO 2020211735A1 CN 2020084594 W CN2020084594 W CN 2020084594W WO 2020211735 A1 WO2020211735 A1 WO 2020211735A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
function
enhanced
party application
enhanced function
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/084594
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陶强
陈俊
于雪松
高光远
张跃
韩静
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020211735A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020211735A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72403User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/0482Interaction with lists of selectable items, e.g. menus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/0485Scrolling or panning
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04883Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures for inputting data by handwriting, e.g. gesture or text
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/445Program loading or initiating
    • G06F9/44505Configuring for program initiating, e.g. using registry, configuration files
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/451Execution arrangements for user interfaces
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72403User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
    • H04M1/72409User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality by interfacing with external accessories
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72469User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones for operating the device by selecting functions from two or more displayed items, e.g. menus or icons

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of terminals and communication technologies, and in particular to methods and related devices for using enhanced functions of electronic devices.
  • Enhanced functions refer to functions independently developed by manufacturers that are not available in electronic equipment produced by other manufacturers, such as the "large aperture shooting" function and "ultra wide-angle shooting” function provided by HUAWEI mobile phones when taking pictures.
  • the enhanced functions of electronic devices can only be invoked by applications (applications, APPs) independently developed by manufacturers, and cannot be invoked by third-party applications.
  • applications applications, APPs
  • the "large aperture shooting" function and "ultra wide-angle shooting" function of Huawei mobile phones can be called by the camera application pre-installed on Huawei mobile phones, but cannot be called by third-party applications such as WeChat, Facebook, and Skype. .
  • third-party applications such as WeChat, Facebook, and Skype.
  • This application provides a method and related device for using enhanced functions of electronic equipment.
  • the enhanced function of the electronic device can be invoked, which is equivalent to that the third-party application can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device, so that the user
  • the enhanced functions provided by electronic devices can be fully utilized to enhance the user experience when using third-party applications.
  • this application provides a method for using enhanced functions of an electronic device.
  • the method is applied to an electronic device that provides one or more enhanced function interfaces for a third-party application.
  • the third-party application is a non-first-party application.
  • An application program provided by a manufacturer, the first manufacturer being the manufacturer of the electronic device, the method includes: in response to a first operation of the third-party application, the electronic device displays a first user interface, and the first user interface It includes one or more enhanced function options, and the enhanced function options are used to provide the third-party application with enhanced functions of the electronic device; in response to a user operation on the enhanced function options, the electronic device provides the The third-party application provides the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option.
  • the electronic device can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when launching the third-party application, so that the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device and improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
  • Enhanced functions refer to functions independently developed by electronic equipment manufacturers that are not available in electronic equipment produced by other manufacturers. In other words, enhanced functions are the difference between electronic devices produced by different manufacturers.
  • the enhanced function may be developed by the manufacturer based on the unique hardware and/or software of the electronic device. For example, Huawei (HUAWEI) mobile phones are equipped with a Leica camera, and the mobile phone can provide "large aperture shooting” function, "ultra wide-angle shooting” function, etc. when using this camera to take pictures.
  • the first operation on the third-party application includes: an operation for starting the third-party application, or, for switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application Operation.
  • the third-party application is WeChat
  • the first operation may be an operation of the user selecting a contact to initiate a video call in the user interface provided by WeChat, or the user may start a video call on the home screen (Home screen). Click on the icon of a live broadcast third-party application.
  • the electronic device in response to the first operation of the third-party application, may display or call up the first user interface in the following two ways:
  • the electronic device In response to a first operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a second user interface, the second user interface includes an enhanced function control; in response to a user operation on the enhanced function control, the electronic device displays the The first user interface.
  • the enhanced function control can be hidden according to user needs. Specifically, in response to a gesture on the enhanced function control, the electronic device displays an interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control on the second user interface; the gesture includes a long-press gesture, a sliding gesture, a double-click gesture, or a reset Press gesture; in response to a user operation on the interactive element used to hide the enhanced function control, stop displaying the enhanced function control. It is understandable that hiding the enhanced function control does not affect the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the user.
  • the enhanced function control after the enhanced function control is hidden, it can be recalled according to user needs. Specifically, the user can click on a blank area on the second user interface to re-call the enhanced function control.
  • the electronic device displays a third user interface; in response to a sliding gesture in the first direction of the third user interface, the electronic device displays the first user interface.
  • the first direction may be a direction from the right side to the left side of the display screen, a direction from the top of the display screen to the bottom, a direction from the left side to the right side of the display screen, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes: in response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the electronic device displays an enhanced function menu corresponding to the enhanced function option on the first user interface, the The enhanced function menu is used to adjust the level of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device for the third-party application. For example, in response to a user operation on the “beauty” function option, the electronic device may display a sliding bar for adjusting the degree of beautification on the first user interface. This allows users to adjust the level of enhanced functions provided by the electronic device according to their own needs.
  • the enhanced function corresponding to one or more enhanced function options, or the enhanced function currently provided to the user by the electronic device may be determined by the electronic device in any of the following ways:
  • All the enhanced functions that the electronic device will have are determined as the enhanced functions currently provided to users.
  • the electronic device can provide the user with all the enhanced functions of the electronic device when starting each third-party application.
  • the third-party application installed on the electronic device can call the enhanced function of the electronic device, and the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
  • the enhanced functions that can be used by the currently launched third-party application are determined as the enhanced functions currently provided to the user.
  • the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may include: enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can provide users with different enhanced functions when launching different third-party applications.
  • the electronic device can provide the user with enhanced functions suitable for the currently launched third-party application.
  • users use different third-party applications on electronic devices, they can use different enhanced functions.
  • the electronic device determines the enhanced function suitable for the current usage scenario as the enhanced function currently provided to the user.
  • the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may be an enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario.
  • the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may refer to the enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario that is compatible with the capabilities currently provided by the electronic device.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device starts a third-party application, it can provide users with different enhanced functions in different usage scenarios provided by the third-party application.
  • the electronic device can provide users with enhanced functions suitable for current usage scenarios. Users can use different enhanced functions when opening different interfaces of the same third-party application on the electronic device.
  • the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the electronic device may include one or more of the following: “beauty” function, “Beauty” function, “Blur” function, “Large aperture shooting” function or “Ultra wide-angle shooting” function.
  • the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the electronic device may include one or more of the following: "network acceleration” function, " Coding optimization” function or "American tone” function.
  • the method before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: in response to the first operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a fourth user interface, and the fourth user interface
  • the user interface includes prompt information and a first interactive element.
  • the prompt information is used to prompt the user to enable or disable the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and/or the third-party application uses the electronic device.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device determines that the third-party application has the permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device in response to the first operation of the third-party application, the electronic device displays the first user interface. In other words, the electronic device displays the first user interface when it is determined that the currently launched third-party application has the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
  • the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device may be enabled by the electronic device by default.
  • the electronic device may default that some or all third-party applications have the permission to use the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device.
  • the third party's authority to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device may be set by the user. Specifically, before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the electronic device displays a fifth user interface, the fifth user interface includes a second interaction element; responding to a user operation on the second interaction element To enable the third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device. In this way, users can set the permissions for each third-party application to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device according to their own needs.
  • the method further includes: in response to a second operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a sixth user interface, the sixth user interface including one or more enhanced function options ;
  • the one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface.
  • An exemplary implementation of the second operation may include an operation in which the user selects a contact in a user interface provided by WeChat and sends a text message to the contact.
  • An exemplary implementation of the sixth user interface may include a text chat interface.
  • the one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface.
  • users can adapt to the usage scenarios and dynamically refresh the enhanced function options provided to users.
  • the electronic device provides the third-party application with the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option through the enhanced function interface, which specifically includes: the electronic device delivers the first parameter through the enhanced function interface To the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device; the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device call the corresponding algorithm and/or hardware device according to the first parameter, thereby providing the third-party application with the corresponding enhanced function option Enhanced functions.
  • this application provides an electronic device that includes: an application program layer, an application program interface, an enhanced function matching module, one or more enhanced function interfaces, a hardware abstraction layer and a kernel layer, and a display module, where :
  • the application layer includes: a functional assistant application, one or more third-party applications; the functional assistant application is an application provided by a first manufacturer, and the third-party application is an application provided by a non-first manufacturer.
  • a manufacturer is the manufacturer of the electronic equipment;
  • the application program interface is used for communication between the third-party application and the hardware abstraction layer and kernel layer;
  • the enhanced function matching module is used to determine the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the currently running third-party application
  • the enhanced function penetration module is used to provide the currently running third-party application with the enhanced function of the electronic device
  • the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer are used to call the algorithm and/or the hardware device of the electronic device, thereby enabling the corresponding function of the electronic device;
  • the display module is configured to display a first user interface in response to a first operation on the currently running third-party application, the first user interface includes one or more enhanced function options, and the one or more enhanced function options correspond to The enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the currently running third-party application determined by the enhanced function matching module; wherein the enhanced function option is provided by the function assistant application.
  • the electronic device provided in the second aspect can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when starting a third-party application, so that the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
  • the first operation on the currently running third-party application includes: an operation for starting the currently running third-party application, or, for the currently running third-party application Provides multiple user interfaces to switch between operations.
  • the third-party application is WeChat (WeChat)
  • the first operation may be an operation of the user selecting a contact to initiate a video call in the user interface provided by WeChat, or the user may start a video call on the home screen (Home screen) Click on the icon of a live broadcast third-party application.
  • the display module is specifically configured to display a second user interface in response to the first operation on the currently running third-party application, the second user interface including enhanced function controls; In the user operation on the enhanced function control, the first user interface is displayed; wherein, the enhanced function control is provided by the function assistant application.
  • the display module is further configured to display an interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control on the second user interface in response to a gesture on the enhanced function control, and the gesture includes a long press gesture, A swipe gesture, a double tap gesture, or a heavy pressure gesture; in response to a user operation on the interactive element used to hide the enhanced function control, stop displaying the enhanced function control.
  • the enhanced function controls can be hidden according to user needs. It is understandable that hiding the enhanced function control does not affect the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the user.
  • the display module may also re-call the enhanced function control in response to a user's click operation on a blank area on the second user interface.
  • the display module is specifically configured to display a third user interface in response to the first operation of the currently running third-party application; in response to the first operation on the third user interface
  • the sliding gesture in the direction displays the first user interface.
  • the first direction may be a direction from the right side to the left side of the display screen, a direction from the top of the display screen to the bottom, a direction from the left side to the right side of the display screen, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the display module is further configured to display an enhanced function menu corresponding to the enhanced function option on the first user interface in response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the The enhanced function menu is used to adjust the level of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device for the third-party application; wherein, the enhanced function menu is provided by the function assistant application.
  • the display module may display a sliding bar for adjusting the degree of beautification on the first user interface. This allows users to adjust the level of enhanced functions provided by the electronic device according to their own needs.
  • the enhanced function matching module is specifically configured to determine all enhanced functions of the electronic device as enhanced functions provided to the currently running third-party application.
  • the electronic device further includes an application identification module for identifying the currently running third-party application; the enhanced function matching module is specifically used for all the enhanced functions of the electronic device
  • the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently running in the NET are determined as the enhanced functions provided to the currently running third-party application.
  • the electronic device further includes a scene recognition and parameter collection module, configured to identify the use scene currently provided by the launched third-party application and the functions currently provided by the electronic device;
  • the enhanced function matching module is specifically used to determine the enhanced function applicable to the use scenario as an enhanced function provided to the currently running third-party application;
  • the enhanced function applicable to the use scenario includes: an enhancement corresponding to the use scenario Function, or the enhanced function corresponding to the usage scenario, which is compatible with the function currently provided by the electronic device.
  • the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the enhanced function matching module may include one or more of the following: “beauty” function, “ “Beauty” function, “Blur” function, “Large aperture shooting” function or “Ultra wide-angle shooting” function. or,
  • the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the enhanced function matching module may include one or more of the following: "network acceleration” function, "encoding” Optimize” function or “Beautiful Sound” function.
  • the display module is further configured to display a fourth user interface in response to the first operation of the third-party application, where the fourth user interface includes prompt information and a first interaction element,
  • the prompt information is used to prompt the user to: enable or disable the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and/or the comparison effect before and after the third-party application uses the enhanced function provided by the electronic device;
  • the first user interface is displayed; wherein the prompt information and the first interaction element are provided by the function assistant application.
  • the function assistant application is also used to determine whether the currently running third-party application has the authority to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
  • the display module is specifically configured to display the first user interface when the function assistant application determines that the currently started third-party application has enhanced functions provided by the electronic device.
  • the permission of the currently running third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device is enabled by the electronic device by default.
  • the third party's authority to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device may be set by the user.
  • the application layer includes a "settings" application; the display module is also used to display a fifth user interface, the fifth user interface includes a second interactive element, the second interactive element is used to monitor the opening or closing of the currently running
  • the third-party application has the right to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device; the fifth user interface is provided by the "settings" application.
  • the display module is further configured to display a sixth user interface in response to the second operation of the third-party application; the sixth user interface includes one or more enhanced function options; The one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface; wherein, the one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are determined by the function Assistant application provided.
  • An exemplary implementation of the second operation may include an operation in which the user selects a contact in a user interface provided by WeChat and sends a text message to the contact.
  • An exemplary implementation of the sixth user interface may include a text chat interface.
  • the one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface.
  • the electronic device can dynamically refresh the enhanced function options displayed by the display module to adapt to the current use scenarios under different use scenarios provided by third-party applications.
  • the enhanced function interface is specifically used to deliver the first parameter to the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer, the first parameter is set by the function assistant application; the hardware abstraction layer and The kernel layer is specifically configured to call the corresponding algorithm and/or hardware device according to the first parameter, so as to provide corresponding enhanced functions for the currently running third-party application.
  • the present application provides a chip that is applied to an electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processor is used to invoke computer instructions to make the electronic device execute the first aspect and the first aspect The method described in any possible implementation.
  • the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions.
  • the computer program product When the computer program product is run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to perform the operations described in the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect. method.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the instructions are executed on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute as described in the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect method.
  • the electronic device can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when the third-party application is started, which is equivalent to that the third-party application can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device, so that the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when the third-party application is started, which is equivalent to that the third-party application can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device, so that the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 2A-2B are schematic diagrams of the method of opening the "function assistant" provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3A-3C are schematic diagrams of another way of opening the "function assistant" provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4A-4H are schematic diagrams of some human-computer interactions provided in a video call scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5A-5F are other schematic diagrams of human-computer interaction provided in a video call scenario according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6A-6H are schematic diagrams of some human-computer interactions provided in a live broadcast scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the software structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a data flow trend involved when a third-party application invokes an enhanced function of an electronic device in a video call scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a collaboration process of various software modules of an electronic device when a third-party application invokes an enhanced function of an electronic device in a video call scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the following embodiments of this application provide a method and related device for using enhanced functions of an electronic device.
  • the enhanced function of the electronic device can be invoked, which is equivalent to that a third-party application can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device.
  • Users can make full use of the enhanced functions provided by electronic devices to improve the user experience when using third-party applications.
  • the enhanced function of the electronic device refers to the function independently developed by the manufacturer of the electronic device that is not possessed by the electronic device produced by other manufacturers.
  • enhanced functions are the difference between electronic devices produced by different manufacturers.
  • the enhanced function may be developed by the manufacturer based on the unique hardware and/or software of the electronic device. For example, Huawei (HUAWEI) mobile phones are equipped with a Leica camera, and the mobile phone can provide "large aperture shooting" function, "ultra wide-angle shooting” function, etc. when using this camera to take pictures.
  • the enhanced function of the electronic device may include one or more.
  • third-party applications refer to applications provided or developed by manufacturers of non-electronic devices.
  • the manufacturer of the electronic device may include the manufacturer, supplier, provider, or operator of the electronic device.
  • a manufacturer can refer to a manufacturer that processes and manufactures electronic equipment with self-made or purchased parts and raw materials.
  • the supplier may refer to the manufacturer that provides the complete machine, raw materials, or parts of the electronic device.
  • the operator may refer to a manufacturer responsible for the distribution of the electronic equipment.
  • the manufacturer of the electronic device may also be referred to as the first manufacturer.
  • third-party applications may also refer to applications that are not pre-installed on the electronic device.
  • apps such as WeChat, Facebook, Skype, Messenger, WhatsApp, and Taobao are third-party apps, and apps independently developed by Huawei such as Huawei Wear, Huawei Mall, and Huawei Mobile Services. It is a non-third-party application.
  • the electronic device when the "functional assistant" of an electronic device such as a smart phone is turned on, when the electronic device recognizes the user's use of a third-party application, the electronic device can actively provide enhanced functions to the user. .
  • the electronic device can extend the enhanced function to the third-party application, so that the user can also use the enhanced function of the electronic device when using the third-party application. In this way, users can make full use of the enhanced functions of electronic devices when using third-party applications, and the user experience is good.
  • the “function assistant” can be a service or function provided by the electronic device, and can be installed in the electronic device in the form of an APP.
  • the “function assistant” can support the electronic device to provide enhanced functions when the user uses a third-party application.
  • the electronic device providing enhanced functions when the user uses a third-party application means that when the third-party application is enabled on the electronic device, some or all of the enhanced functions of the electronic device can be provided to the user, and the user can choose Enable one or more of these enhancements.
  • the manner in which the "function assistant" supports the determination of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device when the user uses a third-party application can refer to the related description of the subsequent embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • some or all third-party applications can use the enhanced functions of the electronic device, that is, some or all third-party applications have the permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device
  • some or all third-party applications with this permission please refer to the related descriptions in the subsequent embodiments.
  • users can use the enhanced functions of electronic devices when using third-party applications. In this way, users can make full use of the enhanced functions of the electronic device, and have a better user experience when using third-party applications installed on the electronic device.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2.
  • Mobile communication module 150 wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • SIM Subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include pressure sensor 180A, gyroscope sensor 180B, air pressure sensor 180C, magnetic sensor 180D, acceleration sensor 180E, distance sensor 180F, proximity light sensor 180G, fingerprint sensor 180H, temperature sensor 180J, touch sensor 180K, ambient light Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU), etc.
  • AP application processor
  • modem processor modem processor
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller video codec
  • digital signal processor digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 to store instructions and data.
  • the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory can store instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • Interfaces may include integrated circuit (I2C) interfaces, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interfaces, pulse code modulation (PCM) interfaces, universal asynchronous transceiver receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transceiver receiver/transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • the processor 110 may be used to determine whether the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device 100 has the authority to use the enhanced function of the electronic device. In some embodiments, the processor 110 may also be configured to determine the enhanced function currently provided to the user in the case that the currently launched third-party application has permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device. For the manner in which the processor 110 determines the enhanced function currently provided to the user, reference may be made to related descriptions in subsequent embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • the I2C interface is a two-way synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through an I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100.
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to realize communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170.
  • the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through an I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through a UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the display screen 194, the camera 193 and other peripheral devices.
  • the MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100.
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through a DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and so on.
  • GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and so on.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through the headphones. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present application is merely a schematic description, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
  • the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in the electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the electronic device 100.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves by the antenna 1, and perform processing such as filtering and amplifying the received electromagnetic waves, and then transmitting them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation via the antenna 1.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays an image or video through the display screen 194.
  • the modem processor may be an independent device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellites.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT wireless fidelity
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication technology
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, perform frequency modulation, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 2.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technologies may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, connected to the display 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more GPUs, which execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • active-matrix organic light-emitting diode active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include one or N display screens 194, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
  • the display screen 194 may be used to display controls, and the controls may be used to monitor and expand the operation of the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device. In response to this operation, the display screen 194 may also be used to display the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device.
  • the control corresponding to the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device can be used to monitor the operation of enabling the corresponding enhanced function.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back from the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transfers the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
  • the camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects the frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in a variety of encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • the NPU can realize applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, and so on.
  • the external memory interface 120 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function.
  • the data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 170 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110, or part of the functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110.
  • the speaker 170A also called a “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
  • the receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 answers a call or voice message, it can receive the voice by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone”, “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can approach the microphone 170C through the mouth to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can implement noise reduction functions in addition to collecting sound signals. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194.
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations that act on the same touch location but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity of the touch operation is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100.
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization.
  • the gyro sensor 180B detects the shake angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 can use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application locks, fingerprint photographs, fingerprint answering calls, etc.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 100 executes to reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device 100 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194, which is also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • the visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194.
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the position of the display screen 194.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can obtain the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure pulse signal.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the voice function.
  • the application processor may analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
  • the button 190 includes a power button, a volume button, and so on.
  • the button 190 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
  • the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration notification, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194, the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate the charging status, power change, or to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect to the SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 195 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 195 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc.
  • the same SIM card interface 195 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 may also be compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication.
  • the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the control can include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, Widgets, etc. Visual interface elements.
  • FIG. 2A exemplarily shows an exemplary user interface 21 on the electronic device 100 for displaying application programs installed by the electronic device 100.
  • the user interface 21 may include: a status bar 201, a calendar indicator 202, a weather indicator 203, a tray 204 with commonly used application icons, a navigation bar 205, and other application icons. among them:
  • the status bar 201 may include: one or more signal strength indicators 201A of mobile communication signals (also called cellular signals), the name of the operator (for example, "China Mobile") 201B, and wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) )
  • One or more signal strength indicators 201C, battery status indicator 201D, and time indicator 201E of the signal are included in the signal.
  • the calendar indicator 202 can be used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, and so on.
  • the weather indicator 203 can be used to indicate the type of weather, such as cloudy to clear, light rain, etc., and can also be used to indicate information such as temperature.
  • the tray 204 with icons of commonly used application programs can display: a phone icon 204A, a contact icon 204B, a short message icon 204C, and a camera icon 204D.
  • the navigation bar 205 may include system navigation keys such as a return key 205A, a home screen key 205B, and a multi-task key 205C.
  • system navigation keys such as a return key 205A, a home screen key 205B, and a multi-task key 205C.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the previous page of the current page.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the home interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the task recently opened by the user.
  • the naming of each navigation key can also be other, which is not limited in this application. It is not limited to virtual keys, and each navigation key in the navigation bar 205 can also be implemented as a physical key.
  • Other application icons can be for example: Wechat icon 206, QQ icon 207, Twitter icon 208, Facebook icon 209, mailbox icon 210, cloud sharing icon 211, memo The icon 212 of, the icon 213 of Alipay, the icon 214 of gallery, and the icon 215 of settings.
  • the user interface 21 may also include a page indicator 216.
  • Other application program icons may be distributed on multiple pages, and the page indicator 216 may be used to indicate which application program in which page the user is currently browsing. The user can slide the area of other application icons left and right to browse application icons in other pages.
  • the user interface 21 exemplarily shown in FIG. 2A may be a home screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may also include a physical home screen key.
  • the home screen key can be used to receive instructions from the user and return the currently displayed UI to the main interface, so that the user can view the home screen at any time.
  • the above instruction can be an operation instruction for the user to press the home screen key once, or an operation instruction for the user to press the home screen key twice in a short period of time, or the user long press the home screen key within a predetermined time Operation instructions.
  • the home screen key can also be integrated with a fingerprint recognizer, so that when the home screen key is pressed, fingerprints are collected and recognized.
  • FIG. 2A only exemplarily shows the user interface on the electronic device 100, and should not constitute a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B exemplarily show an operation of turning on the "function assistant" on the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a window 217 on the user interface 21 in response to the gesture.
  • the window 217 may display the switch control 217A of the "function assistant", and may also display the switch control of other functions (such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, flashlight, etc.).
  • the electronic device 100 may start the "function assistant".
  • the user can make a downward sliding gesture on the status bar 201 to open the window 217, and click the switch control 217A of the "function assistant” in the window 217 to conveniently open the "function assistant".
  • the expression form of the switch control 217A of the "function assistant” can be text information or icons.
  • the third-party applications installed in the electronic device have the authority to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • This part of the third-party application may be set by the electronic device by default; it may also be set independently by the user, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • 3A-3C exemplarily show the other two operations of opening the "function assistant" on the electronic device 100.
  • the user interface 31 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3A may be an implementation of the "setting interface”.
  • the user interface 31 may be provided by the "settings” application.
  • the "settings” application is an application installed on electronic devices such as smart phones, tablet computers and the like for setting various functions of the electronic device, and the name of the application is not limited in the embodiment of the application.
  • the user interface 31 may be a user interface opened by the user clicking the setting icon 215 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A.
  • the user interface 31 may include: a status bar 301, a title bar 302, a search box 303, an icon 304, and an area 305 including one or more setting items.
  • the status bar 301 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the title bar 302 may include a current page indicator 302A.
  • the current page indicator 302A may be used to indicate the current page.
  • the text information "settings" may be used to indicate that the current page is used to display one or more setting items.
  • the current page indicator 302A may also be an icon.
  • the search box 303 can be used to monitor an operation (such as a touch operation) of searching a setting item through text.
  • the electronic device may display a text input box, so that the user displays the setting item that the user wants to search for in the input box.
  • the icon 304 can be used to monitor an operation (such as a touch operation) of searching a setting item by voice.
  • the electronic device may display a voice input interface, so that the user inputs voice in the voice input interface, thereby searching for setting items.
  • the area 305 includes one or more setting items.
  • the one or more setting items may include: login Huawei account setting items, wireless and network setting items, device connection setting items, application and notification setting items, battery setting items, display setting items , Sound settings, function assistant settings 305A, security and privacy settings, user and account settings, etc.
  • the expression form of each setting item may include icons and/or text, which is not limited in this application.
  • Each setting item can be used to monitor an operation (such as a touch operation) that triggers the display of the setting content of the corresponding setting item, and in response to the operation, the electronic device can open a user interface for displaying the setting content of the corresponding setting item.
  • an operation (such as a touch operation) on the function assistant setting item 305A in the user interface 31 shown in FIG. 3A is detected, and the electronic device may display the user interface 32 shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the user interface 32 is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items.
  • the user interface 32 may include: a status bar 306, a title bar 307, a switch control 308 of the "function assistant", and prompt information 309.
  • the status bar 306 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the title bar 307 may include: a return key 307A, current page indicators 307B and 307C.
  • the return key 307A is an APP-level return key, which can be used to return to the upper level of the menu.
  • the upper level page of the user interface 32 may be the user interface 31 as shown in FIG. 3A.
  • the current page indicators 307B and 307C can be used to indicate the current page.
  • the text information "settings" and "function assistant" can be used to indicate that the current page is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items. It is not limited to text information.
  • the current page indicator 307B and 307C can also be an icon.
  • the switch control 308 is used to monitor the operation (for example, touch operation) of turning on/off the "function assistant". As shown in FIG. 3B, when an operation on the switch control 308 (such as a touch operation on the switch control 308) is detected, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can start the "function assistant".
  • the form of the switch control 308 may be text information or icons.
  • the prompt message 309 can be used to introduce the "function assistant" and prompt the user of the function of the "function assistant".
  • the presentation form of the prompt information 309 may be text information or icons.
  • the third-party application has the authority to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device. This part of the third-party application may be set by the electronic device by default, or may be set independently by the user, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device may display the user interface 33 shown in FIG. 3C.
  • the user interface 33 is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items.
  • the user interface 33 may include: a status bar 310, a title bar 311, prompt information 312, and "function assistant" switch controls 313-316 respectively corresponding to one or more third-party applications.
  • the status bar 310 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the title bar 311 may include: a return key 311A, current page indicators 311B and 311C.
  • the return key 311A is an APP-level return key, which can be used to return to the upper level of the menu.
  • the upper level page of the user interface 33 may be the user interface 31 as shown in FIG. 3A.
  • the current page indicators 311B and 311C can be used to indicate the current page.
  • the text information "settings" and "function assistant" can be used to indicate that the current page is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items. It is not limited to text information.
  • the current page indicator 311B and 311C can also be an icon.
  • prompt information 31 refer to the prompt information 309 in the user interface 32 shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be repeated here.
  • the "function assistant" switch controls 313-316 respectively corresponding to one or more third-party applications can be used to monitor the operation (for example, touch operation) of turning on/off the "function assistant".
  • the one or more third-party applications may be all third-party applications installed in the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can turn on/off the corresponding third-party application.
  • Permission for enhanced functions of electronic devices For example, as shown in FIG. 3C, when an operation on the switch control 316 is detected, the electronic device may allow the third-party application Facebook (Facebook) to use some or all of the enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • the form of the switch controls 313-316 may be text information or icons.
  • the electronic device activates the third-party application's permission to use the "functional assistant” through the operation shown in FIG. 3C, the third-party application is added to the "functional assistant" whitelist.
  • the electronic device may also enable the "function assistant" by default, for example, automatically enable the "function assistant” after being turned on.
  • the electronic device after the electronic device starts the "function assistant", it may also display a prompt message in the status bar 201 that the "function assistant" has been started. For example, the icon of "function assistant” is displayed in the status bar 201 or the text "function assistant" is directly displayed.
  • the electronic device may maintain a "function assistant" white list, and add third-party applications with enhanced functions for using the electronic device to the "function assistant” white list. That is, the third-party applications in the "function assistant” whitelist have the authority to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device. If the electronic device activates the "functional assistant" in the manner shown in FIGS. 2A-2B, the electronic device can add some or all of the third-party applications to the whitelist of the "functional assistant". If the electronic device starts the "function assistant” in the manner shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the electronic device can add some or all of the third-party applications to the white list of the "function assistant". If the electronic device starts the "function assistant” in the manner shown in FIG. 3A and FIG. 3C, the electronic device can add the corresponding third-party application to the "function assistant" whitelist.
  • the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device can also be opened in other ways.
  • the user can set the permission for the third-party application to use the enhanced function of the electronic device every time the third-party application is newly downloaded.
  • the following describes some embodiments of the graphical user interface implemented on the electronic device 100 when a user uses a third-party application to enable enhanced functions provided by the electronic device through the "function assistant" in combination with two different usage scenarios.
  • the electronic device when the user manipulates a third-party application installed on the electronic device, the electronic device may provide enhanced functions for the user to use.
  • third-party applications on the electronic device can call enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • FIGS. 4A to 4H take the use scene as a video call scene as an example to illustrate the method for the third-party application on the electronic device to invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device.
  • the "video call interface" provided by the third-party application installed on the electronic device exemplarily shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H is described below.
  • the "video call interface” may be used to display images of both parties in the video call, and one or more related controls during the video call.
  • the image of the party in the video call ie, the image of the user at the end of the electronic device
  • the image of the other party of the video call may be an image sent by another electronic device received by the electronic device through a third-party application that provides the "video call interface”.
  • Related controls during a video call can be used to receive user operations (such as touch operations).
  • the electronic device can perform one or more of the following: switch from a video call to a voice call, hang up the video call, or switch the camera Wait.
  • the user interface 41 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H may be an implementation of the "video call interface".
  • the user interface 41 may be provided by an instant messaging third-party application (such as WeChat).
  • the user interface 41 may be a user interface opened after the user clicks the WeChat icon 206 in FIG. 2A and selects a contact to initiate a video call.
  • the user interface 41 may also be a user interface that is launched after the user clicks the WeChat icon 206 in FIG. 2A and accepts the video call initiated by the contact.
  • it may also be a user interface awakened by the user through voice.
  • the user interface 41 may include: a status bar 401, a display area 402 of the peer user image, a display area 403 of the local user image, a call duration indicator 404, a control 405, a control 406, and a control 407.
  • the user interface 41 may further include a concealable navigation bar (not shown in the figure), and the navigation bar may refer to the navigation bar 205 in FIG. 2A.
  • the status bar 401 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the display area 402 of the image of the opposite end user is used to display the image of the opposite end user of the video call.
  • the image of the peer user is an image sent by another electronic device received by the electronic device through a third-party application that provides the user interface 41.
  • the display area 403 of the image of the local user is used to display the image of the local user of the video call.
  • the image of the local user is the image collected by the camera 193 of the electronic device.
  • the camera is a front camera or a rear camera.
  • the call duration indicator 404 is used to indicate the duration of the video call.
  • the call duration indicator 404 may be text information "00:50", which identifies that the duration of the current video call is 50 seconds.
  • the control 405 is used to monitor the operation of switching the video call to the voice call. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on the control 405, the electronic device can switch the current video call between the local user and the opposite user to a voice call.
  • a detected operation such as a touch operation
  • the control 406 is used to monitor the operation of hanging up the video call. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 406, the electronic device may hang up the current video call between the local user and the opposite user.
  • a detected operation such as a touch operation
  • the control 407 is used to monitor the operation of switching the camera.
  • the electronic device can convert the currently turned on camera, for example, convert a front camera to a rear camera, or convert a rear camera to a front camera Wait.
  • control 405, the control 406, and the control 407 may be icons and/or text information.
  • the user can turn on the "Function Assistant".
  • the user can start the "function assistant” in the window 217 shown in FIG. 2B, or start the "function assistant” in the setting interface shown in FIG. 3B or 3C.
  • the electronic device may also enable the "function assistant" by default.
  • the electronic device displays the user as shown in FIG. 4A At the interface 41, the user may also be prompted to open the "function assistant".
  • the way the electronic device prompts the user to open the "function assistant” may include, but is not limited to: displaying prompt information (not shown in the figure) (for example, text information, icons, etc.) on the user interface 41, emitting prompt sounds, vibrations, and so on.
  • the electronic device may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4B.
  • the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4B may include a small window 408 for introducing the "function assistant".
  • the electronic device may display the small window 408 only when the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened after the "function assistant" is turned on, or it may display the small window 408 each time the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened. There is no restriction on this application.
  • the small window 408 includes: effect display information 408A before the "function assistant” is started, effect display information 408B after the “function assistant” is started, prompt information 408C, control 408D, and control 408E.
  • the effect display information 408A and 408B can present different effects before and after the "function assistant" is turned on, so that the user can intuitively feel the function of the "function assistant".
  • the presentation form of the effect display information 408A and 408B may be pictures and/or text.
  • the prompt message 408C is used to introduce the function and opening method of the "function assistant".
  • the presentation form of the prompt information 408C may be text, such as the text shown in FIG. 4B.
  • the control 408D can be used to monitor the operation of stopping the display of the small window 408 and closing the currently opened third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can stop displaying the small window 408, and close the currently open third-party application (such as WeChat) permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device .
  • the electronic device may only close the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device this time, and restore the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device when the third-party application is opened next time.
  • the electronic device may close the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device, and remove the third-party application from the whitelist of the "function assistant".
  • the manifestation of the control 408D may be an icon or text (for example, the text "Cancel" in FIG. 4B).
  • the control 408E can be used to monitor the operation of stopping the display of the small window 408 and presenting the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may stop displaying the small window 408 and present the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device.
  • the manifestation of the control 408D may be an icon or text (for example, the text "Start Experience" in FIG. 4B).
  • the user interface 41 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 4C-4H may present an implementation manner of enhanced functions provided for the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may display a user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4C.
  • the user interface 41 may include a control 409.
  • the control 409 can be used to monitor and expand the operation of the control corresponding to the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device.
  • the representation form of the control 409 may include icons and/or text. It is not limited to displaying the control 409 in the middle right position of the user interface 41, and the control 409 may also be displayed in other positions such as the middle position on the left side of the screen, the middle position on the top of the screen, and so on. In some embodiments, the control 409 can also be dragged by the user to any position on the screen.
  • the user interface shown in FIG. 4C may further include prompt information 410.
  • the prompt information 410 may be used to prompt the user to view the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, such as the text "click on the icon to view more functions" displayed in the form of bubbles in FIG. 4C.
  • the electronic device may only display the prompt information 410 when the control 409 is displayed on the user interface 41 for the first time, or it may display the prompt information 410 each time the control 409 is displayed on the user interface 41, which is not limited in this application . It is not limited to the prompt information 410.
  • the electronic device may also prompt the user to view the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device by means of voice or the like.
  • the methods for determining the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be as follows: 1.
  • the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be all enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be an enhanced function that can be used by a currently launched third-party application (such as WeChat).
  • the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be applicable to the enhanced function of the current use scene (for example, a video call scene). Subsequent embodiments will describe in detail the method for determining the enhanced function provided when the electronic device runs a third-party application, and will not be repeated here.
  • the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4D shows an implementation manner in which the electronic device expands and displays the control corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function.
  • the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device include: a "beauty” function, a "beauty” function, and a "blur” function.
  • the user interface 41 may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (for example, a click operation) acting on the control 409 shown in FIG. 4C.
  • the user interface 41 can also be the user interface opened after the user clicks the WeChat icon 206 in Figure 2A and selects the contact to initiate a video call or accepts the video call initiated by the contact, or the electronic device responds to the user’s voice.
  • the opened user interface is a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (for example, a click operation) acting on the control 409 shown in FIG. 4C.
  • the user interface 41 can also be the user interface opened after the user clicks the WeChat icon
  • the user interface 41 may include: a control 411A, a control 411B, and a control 411C.
  • the control 411A is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "beauty” function.
  • the electronic device can turn on the "beauty” function.
  • the "beauty” function can be used to beautify the captured face image of the local user in the current video call interface.
  • the beautification process can include skin whitening, skin dermabrasion (such as removing acne on a person’s face) , Freckles, wrinkles, etc.), etc.
  • the control 411B is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "Beauty” function.
  • the electronic device may turn on the "beauty” function.
  • the "Beauty” function can be used to beautify the body image of the local user captured in the current video call interface.
  • the beautification can include, for example, beautifying the body proportions (such as lengthening legs, widening shoulders, etc.), Adjust the body's fatness and thinness (such as thin waist, thin legs, thin belly, thin buttocks, or plump parts of the body, etc.).
  • the control 411C is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "blur” function.
  • the electronic device can turn on the "blur” function.
  • the "blur" function can be used to blur the captured image of the local user in the current video call interface.
  • the blur can include, for example, making the image's depth of field shallow, focusing on the subject, etc. Wait.
  • control 411A may include icons and/or text. It is not limited to controls 411A-411C, and the electronic device may also provide controls corresponding to other enhanced functions, which is not limited in this application.
  • the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4D may further include prompt information 411D, prompt information 411E, and prompt information 411F corresponding to the control 411A, the control 411B, and the control 411C, respectively.
  • These prompt messages can be used to introduce the enhanced functions of the corresponding control.
  • the prompt message 411D is used to introduce the enhancement function corresponding to the control 411A as the "beauty" function
  • the prompt message 411E is used to introduce the enhancement function corresponding to the control 411B as the "beauty” function
  • the prompt information 411F is used to introduce the enhancement corresponding to the control 411C.
  • the function is a "blur" function.
  • the presentation form of the prompt information 411D-411F may be text displayed in the form of bubbles.
  • the electronic device may only display the prompt information 411D-411F when the controls 411A-411C are displayed on the user interface 41 for the first time, or may display the prompt information 411D-411F each time the controls 411A-411C are displayed on the user interface 41 , This application does not restrict this.
  • the user interface 41 exemplarily shown in FIG. 4E may be an implementation manner for a third-party application to call or enable the "beauty" function provided by the electronic device.
  • the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4E may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (such as a click operation) acting on the control 411B shown in FIG. 4D.
  • the user interface 41 may include: a "beauty" icon 412A, a control 412B, and a beautification level indicator 412C.
  • the "Beauty” icon 412A may be used to indicate that the enhanced function selected by the current user includes the “Beauty” function.
  • the “beauty” icon may also be highlighted to indicate that the enhanced function currently selected by the user includes the “beauty function”.
  • the "Beauty” icon can also present other display states (for example, underlined or shaded, etc.) to indicate that the currently selected enhanced function includes the "Beauty" function.
  • the control 412B may be a slider.
  • the control 412B can be used to receive a user's adjustment operation on the degree of beauty of the photographed person (ie, the local user of the video call), and the adjustment operation can be a sliding operation on the control 412B.
  • the beautification degree may refer to the beautification degree for beautifying the body of the person being photographed.
  • the degree of beauty can also be called the level of beauty. For example, there can be a total of 11 body beautification levels from body level 0 to body level 10. The higher the body level, the higher the beautification degree of body beautification; the body level 0 can indicate that the body image of the photographed person is not subject to beautification processing.
  • the body image of the photographed person displayed in the display area 403 of the local user image shows the same body shape as the actual body shape of the photographed person, that is, no body shape beautification occurs; the beauty level 10 can indicate a greater degree of the body of the photographed person Body shape beautification.
  • the body shape of the photographed person displayed in the display area 403 of the local user's image has a greater degree of body shape beautification than the actual body shape of the photographed person.
  • the body level indicator 412C is used to indicate the body level selected by the current user.
  • the appearance form of the body level indicator 412C may be text, for example, the text "7" in FIG. 4E can be used to indicate that the body level currently selected by the user is 7.
  • FIG. 4E compared with FIGS. 4A to 4D, the body image of the photographed person displayed in the display area 403 of the local user image is beautified.
  • the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4F may be an implementation manner in which the electronic device stops displaying or retracts to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function.
  • the electronic device may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4F.
  • the electronic device may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4F in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on a blank area on the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4E.
  • the blank area on the user interface 41 may refer to other areas except controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the local user image display area 403.
  • the user interface 41 can stop displaying or retract the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, that is, stop displaying the "beauty" icon 412A, the control 412B, and the beautification level indicator 412C , And display control 409.
  • the control 409 in FIG. 4F is the same as the control 409 shown in FIG. 4C, and reference may be made to the related description of the embodiment in FIG. 4C.
  • the electronic device may also stop displaying the control 409. 4F-4H show an implementation manner of stopping the display 409 of an electronic device.
  • the control 409 in FIG. 4F can also be used to monitor the operation of stopping the control 409 (for example, a long press gesture).
  • the electronic device may display the control 414 shown in FIG. 4G, and the control 414 may be used to receive user operations (such as a long press gesture).
  • the display of the control 409 may be stopped in response to a user operation received on the control 414.
  • the electronic device may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4H, and the control 409 is no longer displayed in the user interface 41.
  • the electronic device no longer displays the control 409 on the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4H, the electronic device still continues to provide enhanced functions and continues to enable the enhanced functions selected by the user. After hiding the control 409 in the user interface 41, the electronic device can have more display areas for displaying the image of the peer user or the image of the local user, which can facilitate the user to make a better video call and have a better experience.
  • the prompt information 413 may also be included in FIG. 4F.
  • the prompt message 413 can be used to prompt the user to stop displaying the control 409, for example, the text "Long press the icon to hide the function assistant" displayed in the form of a bubble in FIG. 4F.
  • the control 409 can be called up again through user operations.
  • the user operation for re-calling the control 409 may be an operation (such as a touch operation or a click operation) acting on a blank area in the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4H.
  • the blank area may refer to areas other than controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the image display area 403 of the local user.
  • the page layout of the "video call interface” may also present other forms, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the third-party application WeChat WeChat
  • other social communication third-party applications such as Skype, WhatsApp, etc.
  • these third-party applications provide a "video call interface”
  • electronic devices The enhanced function can also be provided by a method similar to the above-mentioned Figure 4A-4H.
  • the embodiment of the present application may also make the electronic device in other ways Expand to display the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided.
  • the user can also view the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device by sliding to call up the sidebar, drop-down bar, or pull-up bar.
  • the application does not limit the sliding direction.
  • the user can call up the sidebar through a gesture of sliding to the left, and view the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device.
  • the user interface exemplarily shown in FIGS. 5D to 5F will be described below.
  • the user interface 51 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 5A to 5B may refer to the user interface 41 shown in FIGS. 4A to 4B, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the text "Start Experience" as shown in FIG. 5B, the electronic device may display a user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5C.
  • the user interface 51 may include prompt information 501.
  • the prompt information 501 may be used to prompt the user to view the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device, for example, the text "swipe to the left, the function assistant can be used" displayed in the form of a bubble in FIG. 5C.
  • the electronic device can detect the leftward sliding operation on the screen, and display the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5D.
  • the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5D shows an implementation manner in which the electronic device expands and displays the control corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function.
  • the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device include: a "beauty” function, a "beauty” function, and a "blurred” function.
  • the user interface 51 includes a control 502A, a control 502B, and a control 502C.
  • control 502A, the control 502B, and the control 502C please refer to the control 411A, the control 411B, and the control 411C in FIG. 4D, which will not be repeated here.
  • the user interface 51 may further include: prompt information 502D, prompt information 502E, and prompt information 502F.
  • prompt information 502D, the prompt information 502E, and the prompt information 502F please refer to the prompt information 411D, the prompt information 411E, and the prompt information 411F in FIG. 4D, which will not be repeated here.
  • the user interface 51 exemplarily shown in FIG. 5E can be an implementation manner for a third-party application to call or enable the "beauty" function provided by the electronic device.
  • the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5E may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (such as a click operation) acting on the control 502B shown in FIG. 5D.
  • the user interface 51 may include: a "beauty" icon 503A, a control 503B, and a beautification level indicator 503C.
  • the "beauty” icon 503A, the control 503B, and the beautification level indicator 503C may refer to the "beauty” icon 412A, the control 412B, and the beautification level indicator 412C in FIG. 4E, which will not be repeated here.
  • the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5F may be an implementation manner in which the electronic device stops displaying or retracts to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function.
  • the electronic device may display the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5F.
  • the electronic device may display a user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5F in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on a blank area on the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5E.
  • the blank area on the user interface 51 may refer to other areas other than controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the image display area of the local user.
  • the user interface 51 can stop displaying or retract to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, that is, stop displaying the "beauty" icon 503A, the control 503B, and the body level indicator 503C .
  • the electronic device can provide enhanced functions in a video call scenario, that is, a third-party application can call the enhanced function of the electronic device in a video call scenario.
  • the electronic device can extend the enhanced function to the third-party application, so that the user can also use the enhanced function of the electronic device when using the third-party application. In this way, users can make full use of the enhanced functions of electronic devices when using third-party applications, and the user experience is good.
  • usage scenarios may include some or all scenarios that can be provided by third-party applications installed on electronic devices.
  • these usage scenarios may include, but are not limited to: social communication scenarios (such as text or voice chat), video call scenarios, video playback scenarios, news information scenarios, video recording scenarios, game scenarios, shopping scenarios, live broadcast scenarios, or audio Recording scenes, etc.
  • the electronic device when the user manipulates a third-party application installed on the electronic device, the electronic device may provide enhanced functions for the user to use.
  • third-party applications on the electronic device can call enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6H use a live broadcast scene as an example to illustrate a method for a third-party application on an electronic device to invoke an enhanced function of the electronic device.
  • the live broadcast scene refers to a multi-functional web live broadcast platform built on the Internet by electronic devices using the Internet and advanced multimedia communication technology, which integrates audio, video, desktop sharing, document sharing, and interaction. A scene of comprehensive communication and interaction of video and data.
  • the following scenes in which the electronic device for the live broadcast scene involved in FIGS. 6A to 6H is provided to the party watching the live broadcast.
  • Figs. 6A-6H The difference between the embodiment of Figs. 6A-6H and the embodiment of Figs. 4A-4H is that the electronic device provides different usage scenarios for enhanced functions, which will be described in detail below.
  • the following describes the "live streaming interface" provided by the third-party application installed on the electronic device exemplarily shown in FIGS. 6A-6H.
  • the "live broadcast interface” may be used to display the image of the host (the user who publishes voice, video, and data on the webcast platform) obtained by the electronic device from the network, and one or more related controls during the live broadcast. Relevant controls during the live broadcast can be used to receive user operations (such as touch operations). In response to the user operations, the electronic device can perform one or more of the following: open comment boxes, display information, display live broadcast friends, and share the "live broadcast interface” Links etc.
  • the user interface 61 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 6A-6H may be an implementation of the "live broadcast interface".
  • the user interface 61 may be provided by a live broadcast type third-party application (for example, Douyu Live, Huya Live, Panda Live, etc.).
  • the user interface 61 may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a user operation (for example, a click operation) on the icon (not shown in the figure) of the live broadcast third-party application in FIG. 2A, It can also be a user interface that the user awakens by voice.
  • the user interface 61 may include: a status bar 601, a current page indicator 602, a live image display area 603, a comment display area 604, and controls 605A-605D.
  • the user interface 61 may further include a concealable navigation bar (not shown in the figure), and the navigation bar may refer to the navigation bar 205 in FIG. 2A.
  • the status bar 601 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the current page indicator 602 may be used to indicate the current page, such as the text "Live Room 1" shown in FIG. 6A.
  • the live image display area 603 is used to display the live image received by the electronic device through the network.
  • the comment display area 604 is used to display comments posted by one or more local users or other users.
  • the control 605A can be used to monitor user operations (such as touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can display a comment box on the user interface 61 for the user to input comments.
  • the control 605B can be used to monitor user operations (such as touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can display information (such as private messages) received by the local user on the user interface 61.
  • the control 605C can be used to monitor user operations (for example, touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can display the live friends of the local user on the user interface 61.
  • the control 605D can be used to monitor user operations (such as touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can share the link of the "live broadcast interface" to other devices.
  • the user can turn on the "Function Assistant".
  • the user can start the "function assistant” in the window 217 as shown in FIG. 2B, or start the "function assistant” in the setting interface shown in FIG. 3B or FIG. 3C.
  • the electronic device may also enable the "function assistant" by default.
  • the electronic device displays the user as shown in FIG. 6A In interface 61, the user may also be prompted to open the "function assistant".
  • the way the electronic device prompts the user to open the "function assistant” may include, but is not limited to: displaying prompt information (not shown in the figure) (for example, text information, icons, etc.) on the user interface 61, emitting prompt sounds, vibrations, and so on.
  • the electronic device may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • the user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6B may include a small window 606 for introducing the "function assistant".
  • the electronic device can display the small window 606 only when the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened for the first time after the "function assistant" is turned on, or it can display the small window 606 each time the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened. There is no restriction on this application.
  • the small window 606 can refer to the small window 408 in the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4B, which will not be repeated here.
  • the user interface 61 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 6C-6H may present an implementation manner of enhanced functions provided for the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6C.
  • the user interface 61 may include a control 607.
  • the control 607 can refer to the control 409 in FIG. 4C, which will not be repeated here.
  • the user interface shown in FIG. 4C may further include prompt information 608.
  • prompt information 608 refer to the prompt information 410 in FIG. 4C, which will not be repeated here.
  • the methods for determining the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be as follows: 1.
  • the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be all enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be the enhanced function available for the currently launched third-party application (such as Douyu Live).
  • the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be an enhanced function available in the current use scene (for example, a live broadcast scene). Subsequent embodiments will describe in detail the method for determining the enhanced function provided when the electronic device runs a third-party application, and will not be repeated here.
  • the user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6D shows an implementation manner in which the electronic device expands and displays the control corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function.
  • the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device include: "network acceleration” function, "coding optimization” function, and "beautiful sound” function.
  • the user interface 61 may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (for example, a click operation) acting on the control 607 shown in FIG. 6C.
  • the user interface 41 may also be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a user operation (for example, a click operation) on the icon (not shown in the figure) of the live broadcast third-party application in FIG. 2A, or It is the user interface opened by the electronic device in response to the user's voice.
  • the user interface 61 may include: a control 609A, a control 609B, and a control 609C.
  • the control 609A is used to monitor the operation of enabling the "network acceleration” function.
  • the electronic device can turn on the "network acceleration” function.
  • the "Network Acceleration” function can be used to speed up the acquisition of live images in the current live broadcast interface.
  • the “Network Acceleration” function can make users watch live images more smoothly and avoid stalls.
  • the control 609B is used to monitor the operation of enabling the "coding optimization” function.
  • the electronic device can turn on the "coding optimization” function.
  • the "Encoding Optimization” function can be used to improve the visual quality of live images in the current live broadcast interface.
  • the control 609C is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "American Voice” function.
  • the electronic device can turn on the "beautiful sound” function.
  • the "beautiful sound” function can be used to beautify the audio corresponding to the live image in the live interface.
  • the beautification can include, for example, processing the tone and tone of the audio.
  • the manifestations of the control 609A, the control 609B, and the control 609C may include icons and/or text.
  • the display state of the control can be used to indicate that the control is selected.
  • the display state may include: adding a background color, underlining, or highlighting, etc.
  • the user interface 61 exemplarily shown in FIG. 6E may be an implementation manner for a third-party application to call the "coding optimization" function provided by the electronic device.
  • the control 609B is selected, that is, the user chooses to enable the "coding optimization" function provided by the electronic device, and the background color of the control 609B can be gray.
  • the visual quality of the live image displayed in the live image display area 603 is improved.
  • the user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6F may be an implementation manner in which the electronic device stops displaying or retracts to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function.
  • the electronic device may display the user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6F. .
  • the electronic device may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6F in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on a blank area on the user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6E.
  • the blank area on the user interface 61 may refer to other areas except controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the local live image display area 603.
  • the user interface 61 can stop displaying or retract to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, that is, stop displaying the controls 609A-609C.
  • the electronic device may also stop displaying the control 607.
  • 6F-6H show an implementation manner of an electronic device to stop displaying the control 607.
  • the manner of stopping the display of the control 607 is the same as the manner of stopping the display of the control 409 of the electronic device shown in FIG. 4F to FIG.
  • the electronic device may also provide enhanced functions in other usage scenarios.
  • the way the electronic device provides enhanced functions in other usage scenarios is similar to the above-mentioned embodiments of Figure 4A- Figure 4H, Figure 5A- Figure 5F, and Figure 6A- Figure 6H. Reference may be made to the relevant descriptions, and no one will be described here. Lift.
  • the enhanced function provided to the user when the electronic device starts the third-party application may refer to the enhanced function that the electronic device can provide to the user to select and enable after the third-party application is started.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 4A-4H, FIG. 5A -The "beauty” function, the "beauty” function, and the "blur” function provided by the electronic device in the embodiment of FIG. 5F for example the "network acceleration” function and the "coding optimization” provided by the electronic device in the embodiment of FIG. 6A-6H ”Function and “beautiful tone function”.
  • the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: all enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • the enhanced function may be developed by the manufacturer based on the unique hardware and/or software of the electronic device.
  • Huawei (HUAWEI) mobile phone is equipped with a Leica camera, based on the camera mobile phone can provide "large aperture shooting” function, "ultra wide-angle shooting” function, etc. when taking pictures.
  • Another example is the “beauty” function, “beauty” function, and “blur” function provided by mobile phone manufacturers independently developed algorithms for taking pictures; the “anti-shake” function and “ultra wide-angle shooting” function when recording small videos ; “Superresolution imaging” function, "color enhancement” function, etc. when playing video; “Beautiful sound” function when recording music, etc.
  • the enhanced function of the electronic device may include one or more.
  • the electronic device can provide the user with all the enhanced functions of the electronic device when starting each third-party application.
  • the third-party application installed on the electronic device can call the enhanced function of the electronic device, and the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
  • the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: among all the enhanced functions of the electronic device, the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently activated by the electronic device.
  • the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may include: enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device.
  • the use scenarios provided by third-party applications are not single, and a third-party application can provide multiple use scenarios.
  • Different third-party applications can provide different usage scenarios.
  • Table 1 exemplarily lists usage scenarios provided by several third-party applications.
  • the usage scenarios provided by instant messaging third-party applications such as WeChat, Skype, WhatsApp, etc. may include: social communication scenarios (such as text or voice chat), small video recording scenarios, video playback scenarios, and reading News scenes, video playback scenes, audio playback scenes, etc.; third-party shopping applications such as Taobao, Amazon and other applications can provide usage scenarios including shopping scenes, live broadcast scenes, etc.
  • the usage scenarios can be classified according to user requirements, or can be classified according to other criteria, such as resources called when the electronic device provides the usage scenario, and this application does not limit this.
  • each enhanced function of the electronic device has a corresponding usage scenario.
  • this enhanced function will only be used in the corresponding use scenario, and will not be used in other use scenarios.
  • different usage scenarios can correspond to different enhanced functions.
  • enhanced functions corresponding to different usage scenarios may be pre-configured in the electronic device.
  • Table 1 exemplarily lists the enhanced functions corresponding to several usage scenarios.
  • the “large aperture” function, “ultra-wide-angle shooting” function, “beauty” function, “beauty” function, etc. are suitable for shooting scenes; “super-resolution imaging” function, “color enhancement” function, etc. are applicable It is suitable for playing video scenes; the “American Sound” function is suitable for recording audio scenes.
  • the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may include: enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device .
  • the electronic device may match or determine the enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application when the third-party application is installed.
  • the electronic device may match or determine the enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application when the third-party application is started.
  • the usage scenarios provided by WeChat include: social communication scenarios, small video recording scenarios, video playback scenarios, and news reading scenarios.
  • the enhanced functions that WeChat can use may include The enhanced functions corresponding to these usage scenarios may include: “red envelope acceleration” function, "fun chat” function, "large aperture” function, “ultra wide-angle shooting” function, “beauty” function, “slimming” function, “super Resolution imaging” function, "color enhancement” function, "read later” function, “intelligent screen recognition” function, etc.
  • the usage scenarios provided by Taobao include shopping scenarios and game scenarios.
  • the enhanced functions that Taobao can use may include: “product historical price display” function, “product quick comparison” function, “network acceleration” function, “ Coding optimization” function, “Beautiful Voice” function, etc.
  • the electronic device may first determine the currently launched third-party application, then determine the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application, and provide the user with the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application.
  • the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may refer to the foreground application of the electronic device, and the foreground application may occupy the screen focus to provide a user with a graphical user interface.
  • the electronic device can determine the currently launched third-party application in any of the following ways: 1. View the name of the task process at the top of the RunningTask stack, which can be used to indicate the currently launched third-party application. 2. Obtain a list of currently running processes through runningProcess, traverse each process in this list, and determine whether the process is a foreground process. If so, the name of the process can be used to indicate the currently launched third-party application . 3. Obtain the usage status of all applications through the UsageStatsManager to determine the currently launched third-party application.
  • the electronic device can provide users with different enhanced functions when launching different third-party applications.
  • the electronic device can provide the user with enhanced functions suitable for the currently launched third-party application.
  • users use different third-party applications on electronic devices, they can use different enhanced functions.
  • the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: enhanced functions suitable for the current use scenario.
  • the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may be an enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario, and reference may be made to Table 2 and related descriptions.
  • the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: “beauty” function, “beauty” function, and “blur” function; if the current use scene is a video playback scene,
  • the enhancement functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: “super-resolution imaging” function and "color enhancement” function.
  • the electronic device can read the resource category occupied by the currently launched third-party application and/or the user interface currently provided by the third-party application in one or more of the kernel layer, the system layer, or the application framework layer, and determine the current usage scenario .
  • the hardware resources occupied by the third-party application include a camera and a microphone
  • the current use scene is a video recording scene
  • the third-party application calls the processor (CPU) for video decoding and occupies audio playback Device (such as speaker 170A, etc.)
  • it can be determined that the current use scene is a video playback scene
  • a third-party application uses a graphics processing unit (GPU) to perform graphics rendering, combined with the identification of the current interface name (such as the current operation of the electronic device)
  • the third-party application is "Glory of the King"
  • the electronic device can grab the interface name "com.tencent.tmgp.sgame.SGameActivity" from the background), and then it can be determined that the current use scene is the game scene
  • the third-party application calls the process
  • the CPU performs video encoding and decoding, and also calls the camera and microphone, and the wireless communication module or mobile communication module has data transmission (that is, there is data exchange with the network server), combined
  • the current interface refers to a graphical user interface provided by a currently launched third-party application that occupies the screen focus.
  • the way the electronic device recognizes the current interface is similar to the way to determine the currently launched third-party application, and you can refer to related descriptions.
  • the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may refer to the enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario that is compatible with the capabilities currently provided by the electronic device.
  • the enhancement functions corresponding to the current usage scenario the enhancement functions that are mutually exclusive with the capabilities currently provided by the electronic device are removed, which is the enhancement function suitable for the current usage scenario.
  • the electronic device can read the resource parameters currently occupied and determine the functions currently provided to the user.
  • the resource parameters currently occupied by the electronic device may include, but are not limited to: camera parameters, codec parameters, display parameters, network parameters, audio parameters, and so on.
  • camera parameters may include resolution, frame rate, focus mode, and anti-shake mode
  • coding and decoding parameters may include: bit rate, I frame interval
  • display parameters may include resolution, display mode (such as SurfaceView, TextureView), and so on.
  • the electronic device can determine that it has provided a "skin beautification" function or an "anti-shake" function through the read camera parameters (such as resolution and focus parameters).
  • the electronic device when the electronic device starts the third-party application, it can provide users with different enhanced functions in different usage scenarios provided by the third-party application.
  • the electronic device can provide users with enhanced functions suitable for current usage scenarios. Users can use different enhanced functions when opening different interfaces of the same third-party application on the electronic device.
  • the control used to monitor the operation of enabling the enhanced function may be referred to as an enhanced function option
  • the user interface used to display the enhanced function option may be referred to as the first user interface.
  • An exemplary implementation of the first user interface may include the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4D, the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5D, or the user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6D.
  • Exemplary implementations of the enhanced function option may include the control 411A, the control 411B, and the control 411C shown in FIG. 4D, or the control 502A, the control 502B, and the control 502C shown in FIG. 5D, or the control 609A, Control 609B, control 609C.
  • the operation for opening a third-party application, or the operation for switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application may be referred to as the first operation on the third-party application .
  • An exemplary implementation of the first operation of the third-party application may include the user selecting a contact in the user interface provided by WeChat to initiate a video call, or the user clicking on the live broadcast category on the home screen The operation of the icon of the third party application.
  • the control used to monitor the operation of expanding the enhanced function option may be called an enhanced function control
  • the user interface used to display the enhanced function control may be called a second user interface.
  • An exemplary implementation of the second user interface may include the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4C or the user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6C.
  • An exemplary implementation of the enhanced function control may include the control 409 in FIG. 4C or the control 507 in FIG. 6C.
  • exemplary implementations of interactive elements for monitoring the operation of hiding the enhanced function control may include the control 414 shown in FIG. 4G or the control 611 shown in FIG. 6G.
  • the user's operation to call out the interactive element may include a gesture on the enhanced function control.
  • the gesture may include a long-press gesture, a sliding gesture, a double-click gesture, or a heavy-press gesture.
  • the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5C may be referred to as a third user interface.
  • the electronic device displays the first user interface.
  • the first direction may be a direction from the right side to the left side of the display screen, a direction from the top of the display screen to the bottom, a direction from the left side to the right side of the display screen, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the control used to adjust the level of enhanced functions provided by the electronic device may be referred to as an enhanced function menu.
  • An exemplary implementation of the enhanced function menu may include a control 412B as shown in FIG. 4E.
  • the user interface for displaying the prompt information and the first interaction element may be referred to as the fourth user interface.
  • An exemplary implementation of the prompt information may include the prompt information 408C in the small window 408 shown in FIG. 4B, the cooperation is deteriorated, the prompt information in the small window shown in FIG. 5B, or the small window 606 shown in FIG. 6B Prompt information.
  • An exemplary implementation of the first interactive element may include the prompt information 408E in the small window 408 shown in FIG. 4B, or the control 606A in the small window 606 shown in FIG. 6B.
  • the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2B, the user interface 32 shown in FIG. 3B, or the user interface 33 shown in FIG. 3C may be referred to as a fifth user interface.
  • the control used to start the "function assistant" in the fifth user interface may be referred to as the second interactive element.
  • Exemplary implementations of the second interactive element may include controls 217A in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2B and shown in FIG. 3B
  • the electronic device may provide different enhanced functions in different usage scenarios.
  • the electronic device may display a sixth user interface in response to the second operation of the third-party application, the sixth user interface including one or more enhanced function options.
  • the second operation on the third-party application may include an operation for switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application, and an exemplary implementation of the second operation may include a user interface provided by the user on WeChat Select a contact and send a text message to it.
  • An exemplary implementation of the sixth user interface may include a text chat interface.
  • the one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface.
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiment of the present application takes a layered Android system as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100.
  • FIG. 7 shows a software structure block diagram of an electronic device 100 exemplarily provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 can invoke enhanced functions of the electronic device when a third-party application is activated.
  • the electronic device may include: application layer, application programming interface (application programming interface, API), enhanced function matching module, enhanced function penetration module, hardware abstraction layer (HAL) layer and The kernel layer (kernel). among them:
  • the application layer includes a series of application packages, such as "function assistants" and third-party applications.
  • the "function assistant” may be a service or function provided by the electronic device, and reference may be made to the related description of the foregoing embodiment.
  • the “Function Assistant” can support the enhanced functions of electronic devices when third-party applications are activated.
  • the enhanced functions of electronic devices please refer to the relevant descriptions in the previous embodiments, for example, may include the "beauty” function, the "large aperture” function, and the “wide angle” Function, "Anti-shake” function, etc.
  • the third-party application program can refer to the related description of the previous embodiment, for example, it can include WeChat, Messenger, Skype, Douyin, etc.
  • the "function assistant" can be used to determine whether the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device has the authority to use the enhanced function of the electronic device.
  • the application program interface is used to realize the communication between the application layer and the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel). For example, it can provide communication between third-party applications and the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel).
  • the enhanced function matching module is used to determine the enhanced function that the electronic device provides to the user when the third-party application is started, that is, it is used to determine the enhanced function that the electronic device provides to the currently running third-party application.
  • the enhanced function matching module may determine all the enhanced functions of the electronic device as the enhanced functions provided to the user when the electronic device starts a third-party application.
  • the manner in which the enhanced function matching module determines the enhanced function provided to the user can refer to the first determining manner mentioned above.
  • the electronic device may further include an application identification module.
  • the application identification module can be used to identify the third-party application currently activated by the electronic device.
  • the enhanced function matching module may determine that among all the enhanced functions of the electronic device, the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device are the enhanced functions that the electronic device provides to the user when the third-party application is launched .
  • the manner in which the enhanced function matching module determines the enhanced function provided to the user may refer to the (2) determination manner mentioned above.
  • the electronic device may further include a scene recognition and parameter collection module.
  • the scene recognition and parameter collection module can be used to identify the current use scene provided by the electronic device and the currently provided functions.
  • the enhanced function matching module is used to determine the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario as the enhanced function provided to the user by the electronic device when the third-party application is started.
  • the method for the enhanced function matching module to determine the enhanced function provided to the user can refer to the above-mentioned (3) determination method
  • the enhanced function suitable for the current use scenario can refer to the above (3) determination method Related description.
  • the "function assistant" in the application layer may present the enhanced function to the user for the user to select the enhanced function that he wants to enable.
  • the way the “function assistant” presents the enhanced function to the user may include displaying controls corresponding to the enhanced function on the screen.
  • the “function assistant” presents the available functions to the user please refer to the relevant descriptions of the embodiments in FIGS. 4A-4H, 5A-5F, and 6A-6H.
  • the user can choose to call or enable one or more of the enhanced functions after the "function assistant" provides enhanced functions.
  • the enhanced function penetration module is used to apply one or more enhanced functions selected by the user to the third-party application, that is, support the electronic device to invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when the third-party application is used.
  • the enhanced function penetration module is used to send the parameters related to the called enhanced function to the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel), so that the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) perform corresponding operations, thereby enabling the enhancement selected by the user Features.
  • the parameter involved in the enhanced function invoked by the electronic device may be referred to as the first parameter.
  • the electronic device may present an effect corresponding to the enhanced function selected by the user in the user interface provided by the third-party application, such as a screen
  • an effect corresponding to the enhanced function selected by the user in the user interface provided by the third-party application such as a screen
  • the HAL layer and the kernel layer are used to perform corresponding operations in response to the enhanced functions invoked by the enhanced function penetration module.
  • the electronic device can call the algorithm of the HAL layer to enable the enhanced function.
  • the electronic device can call the corresponding driver to enable the enhanced function through the hardware device (such as a camera).
  • the hardware device such as a camera.
  • the electronic device can use the HAL layer to call the camera algorithm on the captured image of the local user.
  • the electronic device can call the camera driver of the kernel layer to perform anti-shake processing on the captured image of the local user.
  • the electronic device can call the liquid crystal display (LCD) algorithm through the HAL layer to perform color enhancement processing on the image displayed on the screen;
  • the electronic device can call the image super-division algorithm through the HAL layer to perform pixel super-division processing on the image displayed on the screen.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • the HAL layer and the kernel layer are also used to report state changes that occur after the enhanced functions are enabled to third-party applications (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) in the application layer.
  • the status change includes the activation/deactivation of each enhanced function, the activation level of the enhanced function, and so on.
  • the third-party application can present the user with the activation/deactivation status of each enhanced function and the activation level of the enhanced function. For example, as shown in FIG. 6E, if the user enables the "coding optimization" function, the electronic device can change the display state of the control 609B.
  • the number of the above-mentioned software modules is not limited to one, and may be multiple.
  • the electronic device may have one or more enhanced function penetration modules.
  • the electronic device may be configured with multiple enhanced function penetration modules, and each enhanced function penetration module corresponds to an enhanced function provided by the electronic device for applying the enhanced function to third-party applications.
  • the enhanced function penetration module may also be referred to as an enhanced function interface.
  • the functional architecture of the electronic device shown in FIG. 7 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the electronic device may also include more or fewer software modules, which is not limited here.
  • the electronic device may further include a display module, which is used to display a corresponding user interface according to the operation of each software module.
  • the user interface displayed by the display module can refer to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H, 5A to 5F, and 6A to 6H.
  • the display module can be specifically implemented as the display screen 194 in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 7 Based on the functional architecture diagram shown in FIG. 7, the following uses a specific example to illustrate the method for invoking the enhanced function of the electronic device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 shows a data flow involved when invoking enhanced functions of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the use scenario of this embodiment may be the video call scenario in FIG. 4A-4H or FIG. 5A-5F, in which the electronic device activates the camera.
  • the application layer in Figure 7 corresponds to the application layer in Figure 8;
  • the application program interface in Fig. 7 corresponds to the application framework layer in Fig. 8;
  • the enhanced function matching module in FIG. 7 corresponds to the system service (SystemServer) in FIG. 8;
  • the enhanced function penetration module in Figure 7 corresponds to the camera function service extension (CameraServiceExtra);
  • the application identification module in FIG. 7 corresponds to the system service (SystemServer) in FIG. 8;
  • the scene recognition and parameter collection module in FIG. 7 corresponds to the camera function service extension (CameraServiceExtra) in FIG. 8.
  • the "function assistant" may be used to configure the third-party application that provides the video call scene to use the enhanced function of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device starts a third-party application (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) that can provide a video call scene, and opens a video call interface based on the third-party application to provide a video call scene.
  • a third-party application such as WeChat, Skype, etc.
  • the third-party application of the application layer will send the original parameter stream to the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel).
  • the original parameter stream includes parameters involved when a third-party application provides a video call scene, such as camera parameters (such as resolution, frame rate, focus mode, and anti-shake mode).
  • the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) receive the parameter, they can perform corresponding operations to provide the user with a video call scene.
  • the kernel layer (kernel) receives the original parameter stream of the third-party application, it can call the corresponding driver to provide the user with a video call scene through a hardware device (such as a camera).
  • the system service can send a notification to the "function assistant", and the notification indicates the third-party application that is currently activated by the electronic device.
  • the notification can be broadcast.
  • the data flow direction of the system service (SystemServer) sending notifications to the "function assistant" can be seen in the whitelist monitoring data flow shown in FIG. 8.
  • the "function assistant” determines whether the third-party application that currently initiates the video call has permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • the "function assistant” can check whether the third-party application that is currently initiating the video call is in the "function assistant" whitelist, and if so, the third-party application has permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device.
  • the "function assistant" whitelist can refer to the related description of the previous embodiment. If the third-party application that currently initiates the video call has permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device, the “function assistant” can provide the user with enhanced functions.
  • the manner in which the "function assistant" provides enhanced functions can refer to the related description of the embodiment in FIGS. 4A to 4H or the embodiment in FIGS.
  • the electronic device may display a control 409 as shown in FIG. 4A on the screen for the user to view and call or enable enhanced functions provided by the electronic device.
  • a control 409 as shown in FIG. 4A on the screen for the user to view and call or enable enhanced functions provided by the electronic device.
  • the "function assistant" will send the parameters corresponding to the enhanced functions that the user chooses to enable to the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel), and the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) can be based on
  • the parameters corresponding to the enhanced function perform corresponding operations.
  • the HAL layer can call an algorithm to start the enhanced function
  • the kernel layer (kernel) can call a driver to enable the enhanced function through a hardware device (such as a camera).
  • the electronic device can present the effect of starting the enhanced function.
  • the electronic device can use the HAL layer to call the camera algorithm on the captured image of the local user. Blur processing, and display the blurred image of the local user on the screen.
  • the electronic device can call the image processing algorithm through the HAL layer to perform beautification or body beautification on the captured image of the local user, so that The images of people displayed on the screen present "beauty” and "beauty” effects.
  • the "function assistant” sends the parameters corresponding to the enhanced function selected by the user to the driver of the kernel layer (kernel) for the data flow direction of the driver, please refer to the function assistant parameter flow shown in FIG. 8.
  • the kernel layer (kernel) driver After the kernel layer (kernel) driver receives the parameters issued by the "function assistant", it will report the state changes that occur after the corresponding operations are executed according to the parameters to third-party applications (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) at the application layer ).
  • the status change includes the activation/deactivation of each enhanced function, the activation level of the enhanced function, and so on.
  • the third-party application can present the user with the activation/deactivation status of each enhanced function and the activation level of the enhanced function. For example, as shown in FIG. 6E, if the user enables the "coding optimization" function, the electronic device can change the display state of the control 609B.
  • the driver of the kernel layer (kernel) reports state changes to the third-party applications (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) of the application layer for the data flow trend of the data flow, which can be seen in the callback data flow shown in FIG. 8.
  • FIG. 9 shows a flowchart of a method when a third-party application invokes an enhanced function of the electronic device.
  • the part shown by the dotted line in FIG. 9 indicates that the module is an optional module or the step is an optional step.
  • the implementation of each step in FIG. 9 can refer to the related description of FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, which will not be repeated here.
  • the term “when” can be interpreted as meaning “if" or “after” or “in response to determining" or “in response to detecting".
  • the phrase “when determining" or “if detected (statement or event)” can be interpreted as meaning “if determined" or “in response to determining" or “when detected (Condition or event stated)” or “in response to detection of (condition or event stated)”.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state hard disk).
  • the process can be completed by a computer program instructing relevant hardware.
  • the program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. , May include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: ROM or random storage RAM, magnetic disks or optical discs and other media that can store program codes.

Abstract

A method for using an enhanced function of an electronic device and a related apparatus. In the method, the electronic device provides an enhancement function interface for a third-party application without an enhancement function, and the third-party application can call the enhancement function of the electronic device by means of the enhancement function interface. By implementing the technical solution provided by the present application, a user can fully utilize the enhancement function provided by the electronic device, and the experience of using the third-party application by the user is improved.

Description

使用电子设备的增强功能的方法及相关装置Method for using enhanced function of electronic equipment and related device
本申请要求于2019年04月19日提交中国专利局,申请号为CN 201910319978.7、发明名称为“使用电子设备的增强功能的方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on April 19, 2019. The application number is CN 201910319978.7 and the invention title is "Methods and Related Devices for Using Enhanced Functions of Electronic Equipment". The entire contents of this application are incorporated by reference. Applying.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及终端及通信技术领域,尤其涉及使用电子设备的增强功能的方法及相关装置。This application relates to the field of terminals and communication technologies, and in particular to methods and related devices for using enhanced functions of electronic devices.
背景技术Background technique
随着终端技术的发展,智能手机、平板电脑等电子设备开始具有越来越多的功能。生产电子设备的厂商有很多,为了保证自己的竞争力,大部分厂商生产的电子设备都具有一些增强功能。增强功能是指厂商自主研发的、其他厂商生产的电子设备所不具有的功能,例如华为(HUAWEI)手机在拍照时提供的“大光圈拍摄”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能等。With the development of terminal technology, electronic devices such as smart phones and tablet computers begin to have more and more functions. There are many manufacturers of electronic equipment. In order to ensure their competitiveness, most of the electronic equipment produced by manufacturers have some enhanced functions. Enhanced functions refer to functions independently developed by manufacturers that are not available in electronic equipment produced by other manufacturers, such as the "large aperture shooting" function and "ultra wide-angle shooting" function provided by HUAWEI mobile phones when taking pictures.
电子设备具有的增强功能仅能够被厂商自主研发的应用(application,APP)调用,不能够被第三方应用调用。例如,华为手机的“大光圈拍摄”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能能够被华为手机上预先安装的相机应用调用,而不能被微信(WeChat)、脸书(Facebook)、Skype等第三方应用调用。这样,用户不能充分利用电子设备的增强功能,并且在使用电子设备上安装的第三方应用时的用户体验较差。The enhanced functions of electronic devices can only be invoked by applications (applications, APPs) independently developed by manufacturers, and cannot be invoked by third-party applications. For example, the "large aperture shooting" function and "ultra wide-angle shooting" function of Huawei mobile phones can be called by the camera application pre-installed on Huawei mobile phones, but cannot be called by third-party applications such as WeChat, Facebook, and Skype. . In this way, the user cannot fully utilize the enhanced functions of the electronic device, and the user experience when using third-party applications installed on the electronic device is poor.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种使用电子设备的增强功能的方法及相关装置,电子设备在启动第三方应用时可以调用该电子设备的增强功能,相当于第三方应用可以调用电子设备的增强功能,使得用户可以充分利用电子设备提供的增强功能,提升用户使用第三方应用时的体验。This application provides a method and related device for using enhanced functions of electronic equipment. When the electronic device starts a third-party application, the enhanced function of the electronic device can be invoked, which is equivalent to that the third-party application can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device, so that the user The enhanced functions provided by electronic devices can be fully utilized to enhance the user experience when using third-party applications.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种使用电子设备的增强功能的方法,该方法应用于电子设备,该电子设备为第三方应用提供一个或多个增强功能接口,该第三方应用为非第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,该第一生产厂商为该电子设备的生产商,该方法包括:响应于对该第三方应用的第一操作,该电子设备显示第一用户界面,该第一用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项,该增强功能选项用于向该第三方应用提供该电子设备的增强功能;响应于在该增强功能选项上的用户操作,该电子设备通过该增强功能接口为该第三方应用提供该增强功能选项对应的增强功能。In the first aspect, this application provides a method for using enhanced functions of an electronic device. The method is applied to an electronic device that provides one or more enhanced function interfaces for a third-party application. The third-party application is a non-first-party application. An application program provided by a manufacturer, the first manufacturer being the manufacturer of the electronic device, the method includes: in response to a first operation of the third-party application, the electronic device displays a first user interface, and the first user interface It includes one or more enhanced function options, and the enhanced function options are used to provide the third-party application with enhanced functions of the electronic device; in response to a user operation on the enhanced function options, the electronic device provides the The third-party application provides the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option.
实施第一方面提供的方法,电子设备在启动第三方应用时可以调用该电子设备的增强功能,使得用户可以充分利用电子设备提供的增强功能,提升用户使用第三方应用时的体验。By implementing the method provided in the first aspect, the electronic device can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when launching the third-party application, so that the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device and improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
增强功能是指电子设备的生产厂商自主研发的、其他厂商生产的电子设备所不具有的功能。也就是说,增强功能是不同厂商生产的电子设备之间的区别点。增强功能可以是生产厂商基于电子设备独特的硬件和/或软件来开发的。例如,华为(HUAWEI)手机配置有徕卡摄像头,手机在使用该摄像头拍照时可以提供“大光圈拍摄”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能等。Enhanced functions refer to functions independently developed by electronic equipment manufacturers that are not available in electronic equipment produced by other manufacturers. In other words, enhanced functions are the difference between electronic devices produced by different manufacturers. The enhanced function may be developed by the manufacturer based on the unique hardware and/or software of the electronic device. For example, Huawei (HUAWEI) mobile phones are equipped with a Leica camera, and the mobile phone can provide "large aperture shooting" function, "ultra wide-angle shooting" function, etc. when using this camera to take pictures.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,对第三方应用的第一操作包括:用于开启该第三方应用的操作,或者,用于在该第三方应用提供的多个用户界面之间进行切换的操作。示例性地, 该第三方应用为微信(WeChat),该第一操作可以是用户在微信(WeChat)提供的用户界面中选择联系人发起视频通话的操作,或者,用户在主界面(Home screen)上点击直播类第三方应用的图标的操作。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first operation on the third-party application includes: an operation for starting the third-party application, or, for switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application Operation. Exemplarily, the third-party application is WeChat, and the first operation may be an operation of the user selecting a contact to initiate a video call in the user interface provided by WeChat, or the user may start a video call on the home screen (Home screen). Click on the icon of a live broadcast third-party application.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,响应于对该第三方应用的第一操作,电子设备可以通过以下两种方式显示或者调出第一用户界面:With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in response to the first operation of the third-party application, the electronic device may display or call up the first user interface in the following two ways:
1.响应于对该第三方应用的第一操作,该电子设备显示第二用户界面,该第二用户界面包括增强功能控件;响应于在该增强功能控件上的用户操作,该电子设备显示该第一用户界面。1. In response to a first operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a second user interface, the second user interface includes an enhanced function control; in response to a user operation on the enhanced function control, the electronic device displays the The first user interface.
在一些实施例中,增强功能控件可以根据用户需要而隐藏。具体的,响应于在该增强功能控件上的手势,该电子设备在该第二用户界面上显示用于隐藏该增强功能控件的交互元素;该手势包括长按手势、滑动手势、双击手势或重压手势;响应于在用于隐藏该增强功能控件的交互元素上的用户操作,停止显示该增强功能控件。可理解的,隐藏增强功能控件并不影响电子设备向用户提供的增强功能。In some embodiments, the enhanced function control can be hidden according to user needs. Specifically, in response to a gesture on the enhanced function control, the electronic device displays an interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control on the second user interface; the gesture includes a long-press gesture, a sliding gesture, a double-click gesture, or a reset Press gesture; in response to a user operation on the interactive element used to hide the enhanced function control, stop displaying the enhanced function control. It is understandable that hiding the enhanced function control does not affect the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the user.
在一些实施例中,增强功能控件被隐藏后还可以根据用户需要重新调出。具体的,用户可以点击第二用户界面上的空白区域,从而重新调出该增强功能控件。In some embodiments, after the enhanced function control is hidden, it can be recalled according to user needs. Specifically, the user can click on a blank area on the second user interface to re-call the enhanced function control.
2.响应于对该第三方应用的第一操作,该电子设备显示第三用户界面;响应于在该第三用户界面的第一方向上的滑动手势,该电子设备显示该第一用户界面。该第一方向可以是从显示屏右侧往左侧的方向、从显示屏上方往下方的方向、从显示屏左侧往右侧的方向等,本申请对此不做限制。2. In response to the first operation of the third-party application, the electronic device displays a third user interface; in response to a sliding gesture in the first direction of the third user interface, the electronic device displays the first user interface. The first direction may be a direction from the right side to the left side of the display screen, a direction from the top of the display screen to the bottom, a direction from the left side to the right side of the display screen, etc., which is not limited in this application.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,该方法还包括:响应于在该增强功能选项上的用户操作,该电子设备在该第一用户界面上显示该增强功能选项对应的增强功能菜单,该增强功能菜单用于调节该电子设备为该第三方应用提供的该增强功能的级别。例如,响应于在“美体”功能选项上的用户操作,电子设备可以在第一用户界面上显示用于调节美体程度的滑动条。这样可以使得用户根据自身需求调节电子设备提供的增强功能的级别。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the electronic device displays an enhanced function menu corresponding to the enhanced function option on the first user interface, the The enhanced function menu is used to adjust the level of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device for the third-party application. For example, in response to a user operation on the “beauty” function option, the electronic device may display a sliding bar for adjusting the degree of beautification on the first user interface. This allows users to adjust the level of enhanced functions provided by the electronic device according to their own needs.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,一个或多个增强功能选项所对应的增强功能,或者,电子设备当前提供给用户的增强功能,可以由电子设备通过以下任意一种方式确定:With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the enhanced function corresponding to one or more enhanced function options, or the enhanced function currently provided to the user by the electronic device, may be determined by the electronic device in any of the following ways:
1.电子设备将具备的全部增强功能,确定为当前提供给用户的增强功能。通过第1种确定方式,电子设备在启动每一个第三方应用时,都可以为用户提供该电子设备具备的全部增强功能。可以使得电子设备上安装的第三方应用可以调用电子设备的增强功能,用户可以充分利用电子设备提供的增强功能,提升用户使用第三方应用时的体验。1. All the enhanced functions that the electronic device will have are determined as the enhanced functions currently provided to users. Through the first determination method, the electronic device can provide the user with all the enhanced functions of the electronic device when starting each third-party application. The third-party application installed on the electronic device can call the enhanced function of the electronic device, and the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
2.电子设备在具备的全部增强功能中,将当前启动的第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能确定为当前提供给用户的增强功能。电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能可包括:该电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所提供的一个或多个使用场景所对应的增强功能。2. Among all the enhanced functions that the electronic device has, the enhanced functions that can be used by the currently launched third-party application are determined as the enhanced functions currently provided to the user. The enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may include: enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device.
通过第2种确定方式,电子设备在启动不同的第三方应用时,可以为用户提供不同的增强功能。也就是说,电子设备可以为用户提供适用于当前启动的第三方应用的增强功能给用户。用户在使用电子设备上不同的第三方应用时,可以使用到不同的增强功能。Through the second determination method, the electronic device can provide users with different enhanced functions when launching different third-party applications. In other words, the electronic device can provide the user with enhanced functions suitable for the currently launched third-party application. When users use different third-party applications on electronic devices, they can use different enhanced functions.
3.电子设备将适用于当前使用场景的增强功能确定为当前提供给用户的增强功能。在一些实施例中,适用于当前使用场景的增强功能可以是和当前使用场景对应的增强功能。在另一些实施例中,适用于当前使用场景的增强功能可以指:当前使用场景对应的增强功能中, 和电子设备当前提供的能力兼容的增强功能。3. The electronic device determines the enhanced function suitable for the current usage scenario as the enhanced function currently provided to the user. In some embodiments, the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may be an enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario. In other embodiments, the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may refer to the enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario that is compatible with the capabilities currently provided by the electronic device.
通过第3种确定方式,电子设备在启动第三方应用时,在该第三方应用提供的不同使用场景下可以为用户提供不同的增强功能。也就是说,电子设备可以为用户提供适用于当前使用场景的增强功能给用户。用户在打开电子设备上同一第三方应用的不同界面时,可以使用到不同的增强功能。Through the third determination method, when the electronic device starts a third-party application, it can provide users with different enhanced functions in different usage scenarios provided by the third-party application. In other words, the electronic device can provide users with enhanced functions suitable for current usage scenarios. Users can use different enhanced functions when opening different interfaces of the same third-party application on the electronic device.
在上述第3种确定方式中,若第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为视频通话场景,则电子设备确定的当前提供给用户的增强功能可包括以下一项或多项:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能、“大光圈拍摄”功能或者“超广角拍摄”功能。In the third determination method mentioned above, if the use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a video call scenario, the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the electronic device may include one or more of the following: "beauty" function, "Beauty" function, "Blur" function, "Large aperture shooting" function or "Ultra wide-angle shooting" function.
在上述第3种确定方式中,若第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为直播场景,则电子设备确定的当前提供给用户的增强功能可包括以下一项或多项:“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能或者“美音”功能。In the third determination method above, if the use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a live broadcast scenario, the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the electronic device may include one or more of the following: "network acceleration" function, " Coding optimization" function or "American tone" function.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备显示该第一用户界面之前,该方法还包括:响应于对该第三方应用的第一操作,该电子设备显示第四用户界面,该第四用户界面包括提示信息和第一交互元素,该提示信息用于提示用户:开启或关闭该第三方应用使用该电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的方式,和/或,该第三方应用使用该电子设备提供的增强功能前后的对比效果;响应于在该第一交互元素上的用户操作,该电子设备显示该第一用户界面。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: in response to the first operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a fourth user interface, and the fourth user interface The user interface includes prompt information and a first interactive element. The prompt information is used to prompt the user to enable or disable the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and/or the third-party application uses the electronic device. A comparison effect before and after the enhanced function provided by the device; in response to a user operation on the first interactive element, the electronic device displays the first user interface.
在一些实施例中,电子设备响应于对该第三方应用的第一操作,确定该第三方应用具有使用该电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的情况下,该电子设备显示该第一用户界面。也就是说,电子设备在确定当前启动的第三方应用具有使用电子设备提供的增强功能的情况下,显示第一用户界面。In some embodiments, when the electronic device determines that the third-party application has the permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device in response to the first operation of the third-party application, the electronic device displays the first user interface. In other words, the electronic device displays the first user interface when it is determined that the currently launched third-party application has the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,第三方应用使用电子设备提供的增强功能的权限,可以由电子设备默认开启。例如,电子设备可以默认部分或全部第三方应用具有使用电子设备提供的增强功能的权限。In some embodiments, the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device may be enabled by the electronic device by default. For example, the electronic device may default that some or all third-party applications have the permission to use the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device.
在另一些实施例中,第三方使用电子设备提供的增强功能的权限,可以由用户来设置。具体的,电子设备显示该第一用户界面之前,该方法还包括:该电子设备显示第五用户界面,该第五用户界面包括第二交互元素;响应于在该第二交互元素上的用户操作,开启该第三方应用使用该电子设备提供的增强功能的权限。通过这种方式,用户可以根据自身需求来设置每个第三方应用使用电子设备的增强功能的权限。In other embodiments, the third party's authority to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device may be set by the user. Specifically, before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the electronic device displays a fifth user interface, the fifth user interface includes a second interaction element; responding to a user operation on the second interaction element To enable the third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device. In this way, users can set the permissions for each third-party application to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device according to their own needs.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,该方法还包括:响应于对该第三方应用的第二操作,该电子设备显示第六用户界面,该第六用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项;该第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项不同于该第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项。该第二操作的示例性实现方式可包括用户在微信(WeChat)提供的用户界面中选择联系人并向其发送文字消息的操作。第六用户界面的示例性实现方式可包括文字聊天界面。该第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项不同于第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项。也就是说,用户在第三方应用提供的不同使用场景下,可以适应于该使用场景动态刷新提供给用户的增强功能选项。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to a second operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a sixth user interface, the sixth user interface including one or more enhanced function options ; The one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface. An exemplary implementation of the second operation may include an operation in which the user selects a contact in a user interface provided by WeChat and sends a text message to the contact. An exemplary implementation of the sixth user interface may include a text chat interface. The one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface. In other words, in different usage scenarios provided by third-party applications, users can adapt to the usage scenarios and dynamically refresh the enhanced function options provided to users.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备通过该增强功能接口为该第三方应用提供该增强功能选项对应的增强功能,具体包括:该电子设备通过该增强功能接口将第一参数下发至该电子设备的硬件抽象层及内核层;该电子设备的硬件抽象层及内核层根据该第一参数调 用对应的算法和/或硬件设备,从而为该第三方应用提供该增强功能选项对应的增强功能。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device provides the third-party application with the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option through the enhanced function interface, which specifically includes: the electronic device delivers the first parameter through the enhanced function interface To the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device; the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device call the corresponding algorithm and/or hardware device according to the first parameter, thereby providing the third-party application with the corresponding enhanced function option Enhanced functions.
第二方面,本申请提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备包括:应用程序层、应用程序接口、增强功能匹配模块、一个或多个增强功能接口、硬件抽象层及内核层、显示模块,其中:In the second aspect, this application provides an electronic device that includes: an application program layer, an application program interface, an enhanced function matching module, one or more enhanced function interfaces, a hardware abstraction layer and a kernel layer, and a display module, where :
该应用程序层包括:功能助手应用、一个或多个第三方应用;该功能助手应用为第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,该第三方应用为非该第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,该第一生产厂商为该电子设备的生产商;The application layer includes: a functional assistant application, one or more third-party applications; the functional assistant application is an application provided by a first manufacturer, and the third-party application is an application provided by a non-first manufacturer. A manufacturer is the manufacturer of the electronic equipment;
该应用程序接口,用于该第三方应用和该硬件抽象层及内核层之间的通信;The application program interface is used for communication between the third-party application and the hardware abstraction layer and kernel layer;
该增强功能匹配模块,用于确定该电子设备向当前运行的第三方应用提供的增强功能;The enhanced function matching module is used to determine the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the currently running third-party application;
该增强功能穿透模块,用于为当前运行的该第三方应用提供该电子设备的增强功能;The enhanced function penetration module is used to provide the currently running third-party application with the enhanced function of the electronic device;
该硬件抽象层及内核层,用于调用算法和/或该电子设备的硬件设备,从而启用该电子设备的对应功能;The hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer are used to call the algorithm and/or the hardware device of the electronic device, thereby enabling the corresponding function of the electronic device;
该显示模块,用于响应于对当前运行的该第三方应用的第一操作而显示第一用户界面,该第一用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项,该一个或多个增强功能选项对应于该增强功能匹配模块确定的该电子设备向当前运行的该第三方应用提供的增强功能;其中,该增强功能选项由该功能助手应用提供。The display module is configured to display a first user interface in response to a first operation on the currently running third-party application, the first user interface includes one or more enhanced function options, and the one or more enhanced function options correspond to The enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the currently running third-party application determined by the enhanced function matching module; wherein the enhanced function option is provided by the function assistant application.
第二方面提供的电子设备在启动第三方应用时可以调用该电子设备的增强功能,使得用户可以充分利用电子设备提供的增强功能,提升用户使用第三方应用时的体验。The electronic device provided in the second aspect can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when starting a third-party application, so that the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,对当前运行的该第三方应用的第一操作包括:用于开启当前运行的该第三方应用的操作,或者,用于在当前运行的该第三方应用提供的多个用户界面之间进行切换的操作。示例性地,该第三方应用为微信(WeChat),该第一操作可以是用户在微信(WeChat)提供的用户界面中选择联系人发起视频通话的操作,或者,用户在主界面(Home screen)上点击直播类第三方应用的图标的操作。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first operation on the currently running third-party application includes: an operation for starting the currently running third-party application, or, for the currently running third-party application Provides multiple user interfaces to switch between operations. Exemplarily, the third-party application is WeChat (WeChat), and the first operation may be an operation of the user selecting a contact to initiate a video call in the user interface provided by WeChat, or the user may start a video call on the home screen (Home screen) Click on the icon of a live broadcast third-party application.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该显示模块,具体用于响应于对当前运行的该第三方应用的第一操作而显示第二用户界面,该第二用户界面包括增强功能控件;响应于在该增强功能控件上的用户操作,显示该第一用户界面;其中,该增强功能控件由该功能助手应用提供。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the display module is specifically configured to display a second user interface in response to the first operation on the currently running third-party application, the second user interface including enhanced function controls; In the user operation on the enhanced function control, the first user interface is displayed; wherein, the enhanced function control is provided by the function assistant application.
在一些实施例中,该显示模块,还用于响应于在该增强功能控件上的手势,在该第二用户界面上显示用于隐藏该增强功能控件的交互元素,该手势包括长按手势、滑动手势、双击手势或重压手势;响应于在用于隐藏该增强功能控件的交互元素上的用户操作,停止显示该增强功能控件。也就是说,增强功能控件可以根据用户需要而隐藏。可理解的,隐藏增强功能控件并不影响电子设备向用户提供的增强功能。In some embodiments, the display module is further configured to display an interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control on the second user interface in response to a gesture on the enhanced function control, and the gesture includes a long press gesture, A swipe gesture, a double tap gesture, or a heavy pressure gesture; in response to a user operation on the interactive element used to hide the enhanced function control, stop displaying the enhanced function control. In other words, the enhanced function controls can be hidden according to user needs. It is understandable that hiding the enhanced function control does not affect the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the user.
在一些实施例中,该显示模块还可以响应于用户在第二用户界面上的空白区域上的点击操作,重新调出该增强功能控件。In some embodiments, the display module may also re-call the enhanced function control in response to a user's click operation on a blank area on the second user interface.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该显示模块,具体用于响应于对当前运行的该第三方应用的第一操作,显示第三用户界面;响应于在该第三用户界面的第一方向上的滑动手势,显示该第一用户界面。该第一方向可以是从显示屏右侧往左侧的方向、从显示屏上方往下方的方向、从显示屏左侧往右侧的方向等,本申请对此不做限制。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the display module is specifically configured to display a third user interface in response to the first operation of the currently running third-party application; in response to the first operation on the third user interface The sliding gesture in the direction displays the first user interface. The first direction may be a direction from the right side to the left side of the display screen, a direction from the top of the display screen to the bottom, a direction from the left side to the right side of the display screen, etc., which is not limited in this application.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该显示模块,还用于响应于在该增强功能选项上的用户操作,在该第一用户界面上显示和该增强功能选项对应的增强功能菜单,该增强功能菜单 用于调节该电子设备为该第三方应用提供的该增强功能的级别;其中,该增强功能菜单由该功能助手应用提供。例如,响应于在“美体”功能选项上的用户操作,显示模块可以在第一用户界面上显示用于调节美体程度的滑动条。这样可以使得用户根据自身需求调节电子设备提供的增强功能的级别。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the display module is further configured to display an enhanced function menu corresponding to the enhanced function option on the first user interface in response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the The enhanced function menu is used to adjust the level of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device for the third-party application; wherein, the enhanced function menu is provided by the function assistant application. For example, in response to a user operation on the “beauty” function option, the display module may display a sliding bar for adjusting the degree of beautification on the first user interface. This allows users to adjust the level of enhanced functions provided by the electronic device according to their own needs.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该增强功能匹配模块具体用于,将该电子设备具备的全部增强功能确定为向当前运行的该第三方应用提供的增强功能。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the enhanced function matching module is specifically configured to determine all enhanced functions of the electronic device as enhanced functions provided to the currently running third-party application.
结合第二方面,在另一些实施例中,该电子设备还包括应用识别模块,用于识别当前运行的该第三方应用;该增强功能匹配模块具体用于,将该电子设备具备的全部增强功能中当前运行的该第三方应用能够使用的增强功能确定为向当前运行的该第三方应用提供的增强功能。With reference to the second aspect, in some other embodiments, the electronic device further includes an application identification module for identifying the currently running third-party application; the enhanced function matching module is specifically used for all the enhanced functions of the electronic device The enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently running in the NET are determined as the enhanced functions provided to the currently running third-party application.
结合第二方面,在又一些实施例中,该电子设备还包括场景识别及参数搜集模块,用于识别启动的该第三方应用当前提供的使用场景,以及,该电子设备当前已经提供的功能;该增强功能匹配模块具体用于,将适用于该使用场景的增强功能确定为向当前运行的该第三方应用提供的增强功能;适用于该使用场景的增强功能包括:和该使用场景对应的增强功能,或者,该使用场景对应的增强功能中和该电子设备当前已经提供的功能兼容的增强功能。With reference to the second aspect, in still other embodiments, the electronic device further includes a scene recognition and parameter collection module, configured to identify the use scene currently provided by the launched third-party application and the functions currently provided by the electronic device; The enhanced function matching module is specifically used to determine the enhanced function applicable to the use scenario as an enhanced function provided to the currently running third-party application; the enhanced function applicable to the use scenario includes: an enhancement corresponding to the use scenario Function, or the enhanced function corresponding to the usage scenario, which is compatible with the function currently provided by the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,若第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为视频通话场景,则增强功能匹配模块确定的当前提供给用户的增强功能可包括以下一项或多项:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能、“大光圈拍摄”功能或者“超广角拍摄”功能。或者,In some embodiments, if the use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a video call scenario, the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the enhanced function matching module may include one or more of the following: "beauty" function, " "Beauty" function, "Blur" function, "Large aperture shooting" function or "Ultra wide-angle shooting" function. or,
在一些实施例中,若第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为直播场景,则增强功能匹配模块确定的当前提供给用户的增强功能可包括以下一项或多项:“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能或者“美音”功能。In some embodiments, if the use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a live broadcast scenario, the enhanced function currently provided to the user determined by the enhanced function matching module may include one or more of the following: "network acceleration" function, "encoding" Optimize” function or “Beautiful Sound” function.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该显示模块,还用于响应于对该第三方应用的第一操作,显示第四用户界面,该第四用户界面包括提示信息和第一交互元素,该提示信息用于提示用户:开启或关闭该第三方应用使用该电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的方式,和/或,该第三方应用使用该电子设备提供的增强功能前后的对比效果;响应于在该第一交互元素上的用户操作,显示该第一用户界面;其中,该提示信息和该第一交互元素由该功能助手应用提供。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the display module is further configured to display a fourth user interface in response to the first operation of the third-party application, where the fourth user interface includes prompt information and a first interaction element, The prompt information is used to prompt the user to: enable or disable the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and/or the comparison effect before and after the third-party application uses the enhanced function provided by the electronic device; During a user operation on the first interaction element, the first user interface is displayed; wherein the prompt information and the first interaction element are provided by the function assistant application.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该功能助手应用还用于确定当前运行的该第三方应用是否具有使用该电子设备提供的增强功能的权限。该显示模块具体用于在该功能助手应用确定当前启动的第三方应用具有使用电子设备提供的增强功能的情况下,显示第一用户界面。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the function assistant application is also used to determine whether the currently running third-party application has the authority to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device. The display module is specifically configured to display the first user interface when the function assistant application determines that the currently started third-party application has enhanced functions provided by the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,当前运行的该第三方应用使用该电子设备提供的增强功能的权限,由该电子设备默认开启。In some embodiments, the permission of the currently running third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device is enabled by the electronic device by default.
在另一些实施例中,第三方使用电子设备提供的增强功能的权限,可以由用户来设置。具体的,该应用程序层包括“设置”应用;该显示模块还用于显示第五用户界面,该第五用户界面包括第二交互元素,该第二交互元素用于监听开启或关闭当前运行的该第三方应用使用该电子设备提供的增强功能的权限;该第五用户界面由该“设置”应用提供。In other embodiments, the third party's authority to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device may be set by the user. Specifically, the application layer includes a "settings" application; the display module is also used to display a fifth user interface, the fifth user interface includes a second interactive element, the second interactive element is used to monitor the opening or closing of the currently running The third-party application has the right to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device; the fifth user interface is provided by the "settings" application.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该显示模块,还用于响应于对该第三方应用的第二操作而显示第六用户界面;该第六用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项;该第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项不同于该第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项;其中,该 第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项由该功能助手应用提供。该第二操作的示例性实现方式可包括用户在微信(WeChat)提供的用户界面中选择联系人并向其发送文字消息的操作。第六用户界面的示例性实现方式可包括文字聊天界面。该第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项不同于第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项。也就是说,电子设备可以在第三方应用提供的不同使用场景下,适应于当前使用场景动态刷新显示模块显示的增强功能选项。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the display module is further configured to display a sixth user interface in response to the second operation of the third-party application; the sixth user interface includes one or more enhanced function options; The one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface; wherein, the one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are determined by the function Assistant application provided. An exemplary implementation of the second operation may include an operation in which the user selects a contact in a user interface provided by WeChat and sends a text message to the contact. An exemplary implementation of the sixth user interface may include a text chat interface. The one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface. In other words, the electronic device can dynamically refresh the enhanced function options displayed by the display module to adapt to the current use scenarios under different use scenarios provided by third-party applications.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该增强功能接口具体用于,将第一参数下发至该硬件抽象层及内核层,该第一参数由该功能助手应用设置;该硬件抽象层及内核层具体用于,根据该第一参数调用对应的算法和/或硬件设备,从而为当前运行的该第三方应用提供对应的增强功能。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the enhanced function interface is specifically used to deliver the first parameter to the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer, the first parameter is set by the function assistant application; the hardware abstraction layer and The kernel layer is specifically configured to call the corresponding algorithm and/or hardware device according to the first parameter, so as to provide corresponding enhanced functions for the currently running third-party application.
第三方面,本申请提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备为第三方应用提供一个或多个增强功能接口,该第三方应用为非第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,该第一生产厂商为该电子设备的生产商,其特征在于,该电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器和显示屏;该存储器与该一个或多个处理器耦合,该存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,该一个或多个处理器调用该计算机指令以使得该电子设备执行如第一方面以及第一方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a third aspect, this application provides an electronic device that provides one or more enhanced function interfaces for third-party applications. The third-party applications are applications provided by a non-first manufacturer, and the first manufacturer is The manufacturer of the electronic device is characterized in that the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, and a display screen; the memory is coupled with the one or more processors, the memory is used to store computer program codes, the The computer program code includes computer instructions, and the one or more processors invoke the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute the method described in the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect.
第四方面,本申请提供了一种芯片,该芯片应用于电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,该处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得该电子设备执行如第一方面以及第一方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a chip that is applied to an electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processor is used to invoke computer instructions to make the electronic device execute the first aspect and the first aspect The method described in any possible implementation.
第五方面,本申请提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当上述计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得上述电子设备执行如第一方面以及第一方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions. When the computer program product is run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to perform the operations described in the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect. method.
第六方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当上述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得上述电子设备执行如第一方面以及第一方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the instructions are executed on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute as described in the first aspect and any possible implementation of the first aspect method.
实施本申请提供的技术方案,电子设备在启动第三方应用时可以调用该电子设备的增强功能,相当于第三方应用可以调用电子设备的增强功能,使得用户可以充分利用电子设备提供的增强功能,提升用户使用第三方应用时的体验。To implement the technical solution provided by this application, the electronic device can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when the third-party application is started, which is equivalent to that the third-party application can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device, so that the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device. Improve user experience when using third-party applications.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供的电子设备的结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2A-图2B是本申请实施例提供的开启“功能助手”的方式的示意图;2A-2B are schematic diagrams of the method of opening the "function assistant" provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3A-图3C是本申请实施例提供的另一种开启“功能助手”的方式的示意图;3A-3C are schematic diagrams of another way of opening the "function assistant" provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4A-图4H是本申请实施例提供的在视频通话场景下提供的一些人机交互示意图;4A-4H are schematic diagrams of some human-computer interactions provided in a video call scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5A-图5F是本申请实施例提供的在视频通话场景下提供的另一些人机交互示意图;5A-5F are other schematic diagrams of human-computer interaction provided in a video call scenario according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6A-图6H是本申请实施例提供的在直播场景下提供的一些人机交互示意图;6A-6H are schematic diagrams of some human-computer interactions provided in a live broadcast scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的电子设备的软件结构示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the software structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的在视频通话场景下,第三方应用调用电子设备的增强功能时涉及到的数据流走向示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a data flow trend involved when a third-party application invokes an enhanced function of an electronic device in a video call scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的在视频通话场景下第三方应用调用电子设备的增强功能时, 电子设备的各个软件模块的协作流程示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a collaboration process of various software modules of an electronic device when a third-party application invokes an enhanced function of an electronic device in a video call scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请以下实施例中所使用的术语只是为了描述特定实施例的目的,而并非旨在作为对本申请的限制。如在本申请的说明书和所附权利要求书中所使用的那样,单数表达形式“一个”、“一种”、“所述”、“上述”、“该”和“这一”旨在也包括复数表达形式,除非其上下文中明确地有相反指示。还应当理解,本申请中使用的术语“和/或”是指并包含一个或多个所列出项目的任何或所有可能组合。The terms used in the following embodiments of the application are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments, and are not intended to limit the application. As used in the specification and appended claims of this application, the singular expressions "a", "an", "said", "above", "the" and "this" are intended to also Including plural expressions, unless the context clearly indicates to the contrary. It should also be understood that the term "and/or" used in this application refers to and includes any or all possible combinations of one or more of the listed items.
本申请以下实施例提供了一种使用电子设备的增强功能的方法及相关装置,电子设备在启动第三方应用时可以调用该电子设备的增强功能,相当于第三方应用可以调用电子设备的增强功能,用户可以充分利用电子设备提供的增强功能,提升用户使用第三方应用时的体验。The following embodiments of this application provide a method and related device for using enhanced functions of an electronic device. When the electronic device starts a third-party application, the enhanced function of the electronic device can be invoked, which is equivalent to that a third-party application can invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device. , Users can make full use of the enhanced functions provided by electronic devices to improve the user experience when using third-party applications.
在本申请以下实施例中,电子设备的增强功能是指电子设备的生产厂商自主研发的、其他厂商生产的电子设备所不具有的功能。也就是说,增强功能是不同厂商生产的电子设备之间的区别点。增强功能可以是生产厂商基于电子设备独特的硬件和/或软件来开发的。例如,华为(HUAWEI)手机配置有徕卡摄像头,手机在使用该摄像头拍照时可以提供“大光圈拍摄”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能等。又例如,手机生产厂商自主研发算法从而提供的拍照时的“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能等;录制小视频时的“防抖”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能;播放视频时的“超分辨率(superresolution)成像”功能、“色彩增强”功能等;录制音乐时的“美音”功能等。可以看出,电子设备的增强功能可包括一个或多个。In the following embodiments of the present application, the enhanced function of the electronic device refers to the function independently developed by the manufacturer of the electronic device that is not possessed by the electronic device produced by other manufacturers. In other words, enhanced functions are the difference between electronic devices produced by different manufacturers. The enhanced function may be developed by the manufacturer based on the unique hardware and/or software of the electronic device. For example, Huawei (HUAWEI) mobile phones are equipped with a Leica camera, and the mobile phone can provide "large aperture shooting" function, "ultra wide-angle shooting" function, etc. when using this camera to take pictures. Another example is the "beauty" function, "beauty" function, and "blur" function provided by mobile phone manufacturers independently developed algorithms for taking pictures; the "anti-shake" function and "ultra wide-angle shooting" function when recording small videos ; "Superresolution imaging" function, "color enhancement" function, etc. when playing video; "Beautiful sound" function when recording music, etc. It can be seen that the enhanced function of the electronic device may include one or more.
可以理解的是,“增强功能”只是本实施例中所使用的一个词语,其代表的含义在本实施例中已经记载,其名称并不能对本实施例构成任何限制。在本申请其他一些实施例中,“增强功能”也可以被称为例如“私有技术”“私有功能”“专有功能”等其他名词。It is understandable that "enhanced function" is only a word used in this embodiment, and its representative meaning has been recorded in this embodiment, and its name does not constitute any limitation on this embodiment. In some other embodiments of the present application, "enhanced function" may also be referred to as other terms such as "private technology", "private function", and "proprietary function".
在本申请实施例中,第三方应用是指非电子设备的生产商所提供或研发的应用程序。电子设备的生产商可以包括该电子设备的制造商、供应商、提供商或运营商等。制造商可以是指以自制或采购的零件及原料来加工制造电子设备的生产厂商。供应商可以是指提供该电子设备的整机、原料或零件的厂商。运营商可以是指负责该电子设备的经销的厂商。在本申请实施例中,电子设备的生产商也可以被称为第一生产厂商。在一些实施例中,第三方应用也可以是指电子设备上没有预装的应用。例如,对于华为手机来说,微信(WeChat)、脸书(Facebook)、Skype、Messenger、WhatsApp、淘宝等APP属于第三方应用,华为自主研发的应用如华为穿戴、华为商城、华为移动服务等APP属于非第三方应用。In the embodiments of the present application, third-party applications refer to applications provided or developed by manufacturers of non-electronic devices. The manufacturer of the electronic device may include the manufacturer, supplier, provider, or operator of the electronic device. A manufacturer can refer to a manufacturer that processes and manufactures electronic equipment with self-made or purchased parts and raw materials. The supplier may refer to the manufacturer that provides the complete machine, raw materials, or parts of the electronic device. The operator may refer to a manufacturer responsible for the distribution of the electronic equipment. In the embodiments of the present application, the manufacturer of the electronic device may also be referred to as the first manufacturer. In some embodiments, third-party applications may also refer to applications that are not pre-installed on the electronic device. For example, for Huawei mobile phones, apps such as WeChat, Facebook, Skype, Messenger, WhatsApp, and Taobao are third-party apps, and apps independently developed by Huawei such as Huawei Wear, Huawei Mall, and Huawei Mobile Services. It is a non-third-party application.
在本申请以下实施例中,在智能手机等电子设备的“功能助手”开启的条件下,当电子设备识别出用户使用第三方应用的场景时,该电子设备可以主动将增强功能提供给用户使用。也就是说,电子设备可以将增强功能扩展到第三方应用中,使得用户在使用第三方应用时也可以使用到电子设备的增强功能。这样,用户在使用第三方应用时,可以充分利用电子设备的增强功能,用户体验佳。In the following embodiments of this application, when the "functional assistant" of an electronic device such as a smart phone is turned on, when the electronic device recognizes the user's use of a third-party application, the electronic device can actively provide enhanced functions to the user. . In other words, the electronic device can extend the enhanced function to the third-party application, so that the user can also use the enhanced function of the electronic device when using the third-party application. In this way, users can make full use of the enhanced functions of electronic devices when using third-party applications, and the user experience is good.
“功能助手”可以是电子设备提供的一种服务或功能,可以以APP的形式安装于电子设备中。在本申请实施例中,“功能助手”可支持该电子设备在用户使用第三方应用时提供增强功能。在本申请实施例中,电子设备在用户使用第三方应用时提供增强功能是指,在该电子设备启用第三方应用时,该电子设备的部分或全部增强功能可以被提供给用户,用户可以选 择启用这些增强功能中的一个或多个。这里,“功能助手”支持电子设备在用户使用第三方应用时所提供的增强功能的确定方式可参照后续实施例的相关描述,在此暂不赘述。The "function assistant" can be a service or function provided by the electronic device, and can be installed in the electronic device in the form of an APP. In the embodiment of the present application, the "function assistant" can support the electronic device to provide enhanced functions when the user uses a third-party application. In the embodiments of the present application, the electronic device providing enhanced functions when the user uses a third-party application means that when the third-party application is enabled on the electronic device, some or all of the enhanced functions of the electronic device can be provided to the user, and the user can choose Enable one or more of these enhancements. Here, the manner in which the "function assistant" supports the determination of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device when the user uses a third-party application can refer to the related description of the subsequent embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,开启电子设备的“功能助手”后,部分或全部第三方应用可以使用该电子设备的增强功能,即该部分或全部第三方应用具有使用该电子设备的增强功能的权限,具有该权限的部分或全部第三方应用可参照后续实施例的相关描述。通过“功能助手”,用户在使用第三方应用时可以使用到电子设备具备的增强功能。这样,用户可以充分利用电子设备的增强功能,在使用电子设备上安装的第三方应用时的用户体验佳。In the embodiment of this application, after the "function assistant" of the electronic device is turned on, some or all third-party applications can use the enhanced functions of the electronic device, that is, some or all third-party applications have the permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device For some or all third-party applications with this permission, please refer to the related descriptions in the subsequent embodiments. Through the "function assistant", users can use the enhanced functions of electronic devices when using third-party applications. In this way, users can make full use of the enhanced functions of the electronic device, and have a better user experience when using third-party applications installed on the electronic device.
可以理解的是,“功能助手”只是本实施例中所使用的一个词语,其代表的含义在本实施例中已经记载,其名称并不能对本实施例构成任何限制。It is understandable that "function assistant" is only a word used in this embodiment, and its representative meaning has been recorded in this embodiment, and its name does not constitute any limitation to this embodiment.
下面首先介绍本申请以下实施例中提供的示例性电子设备100。The following first introduces an exemplary electronic device 100 provided in the following embodiments of the present application.
图1示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。FIG. 1 shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100.
电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2. , Mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include pressure sensor 180A, gyroscope sensor 180B, air pressure sensor 180C, magnetic sensor 180D, acceleration sensor 180E, distance sensor 180F, proximity light sensor 180G, fingerprint sensor 180H, temperature sensor 180J, touch sensor 180K, ambient light Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100. In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU), etc. Among them, the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 to store instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory can store instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface, MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. Interfaces may include integrated circuit (I2C) interfaces, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interfaces, pulse code modulation (PCM) interfaces, universal asynchronous transceiver receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, etc.
在本申请实施例中,处理器110可用于确定电子设备100当前启动的第三方应用是否有权限使用电子设备的增强功能。在一些实施例中,处理器110还可以用于在当前启动的第三方应用有权限使用电子设备的增强功能的情况下,确定当前提供给用户的增强功能。处理器110确定当前提供给用户的增强功能的方式可参照后续实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor 110 may be used to determine whether the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device 100 has the authority to use the enhanced function of the electronic device. In some embodiments, the processor 110 may also be configured to determine the enhanced function currently provided to the user in the case that the currently launched third-party application has permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device. For the manner in which the processor 110 determines the enhanced function currently provided to the user, reference may be made to related descriptions in subsequent embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a two-way synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through an I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100.
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to realize communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through an I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communication to sample, quantize and encode analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160. For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through a UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the display screen 194, the camera 193 and other peripheral devices. The MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100. The processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through a DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100.
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured through software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and so on. GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and so on. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through the headphones. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present application is merely a schematic description, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100. In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130. In some embodiments of wireless charging, the charging management module 140 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110. The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160. The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110. In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。The antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in the electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example, antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the electronic device 100. The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves by the antenna 1, and perform processing such as filtering and amplifying the received electromagnetic waves, and then transmitting them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation via the antenna 1. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。The modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays an image or video through the display screen 194. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be an independent device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellites. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110. The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, perform frequency modulation, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 2.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信 模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technologies may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, connected to the display 194 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. The processor 110 may include one or more GPUs, which execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode). AMOLED, flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include one or N display screens 194, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
在本申请实施例中,显示屏194可用于显示控件,该控件可用于监听展开显示电子设备当前可提供的增强功能所对应的控件的操作。响应于该操作,显示屏194还可以用于显示电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件。电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件可用于监听启用对应的增强功能的操作。电子设备确定当前提供给用户的增强功能的方式可参照后续实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, the display screen 194 may be used to display controls, and the controls may be used to monitor and expand the operation of the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device. In response to this operation, the display screen 194 may also be used to display the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device. The control corresponding to the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device can be used to monitor the operation of enabling the corresponding enhanced function. For the manner in which the electronic device determines the enhanced function currently provided to the user, reference may be made to the related description in the subsequent embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back from the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transfers the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。The camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects the frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in a variety of encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, for example, the transfer mode between human brain neurons, it can quickly process input information and can continuously learn by itself. The NPU can realize applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, and so on.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,和/或存储在设置于处理器中的存储器的指令,执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。The internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions. The internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area. Among them, the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function. The data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100. In addition, the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), etc. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal. The audio module 170 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110, or part of the functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110.
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。The speaker 170A, also called a "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。The receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 answers a call or voice message, it can receive the voice by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。The microphone 170C, also called "microphone", "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can approach the microphone 170C through the mouth to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can implement noise reduction functions in addition to collecting sound signals. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone interface 170D is used to connect wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有 导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194. There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors and so on. The capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations that act on the same touch location but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity of the touch operation is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100. In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) can be determined by the gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the shake angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 can use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Furthermore, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers and so on.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 180F, used to measure distance. The electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 can use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。The proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application locks, fingerprint photographs, fingerprint answering calls, etc.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子 设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 100 executes to reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also called "touch panel". The touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194, which is also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. The visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194. In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the position of the display screen 194.
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can obtain the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure pulse signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the voice function. The application processor may analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The button 190 includes a power button, a volume button, and so on. The button 190 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration notification, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as photographing, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194, the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Different application scenarios (for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate the charging status, power change, or to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect to the SIM card. The SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 195 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 195 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1. The SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc. The same SIM card interface 195 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 may also be compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100.
下面介绍电子设备100提供的一些示例性用户界面(user interface,UI)。本申请的说明书和权利要求书及附图中的术语“用户界面”,是应用程序或操作系统与用户之间进行交互和信息交换的介质接口,它实现信息的内部形式与用户可以接受形式之间的转换。用户界面常用的表现形式是图形用户界面(graphic user interface,GUI),是指采用图形方式显示的与计算机操作相关的用户界面。它可以是在电子设备的显示屏中显示的一个图标、窗口、控件等界面元素,其中控件可以包括图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面元素。The following introduces some exemplary user interfaces (UI) provided by the electronic device 100. The term "user interface" in the specification, claims and drawings of this application is a medium interface for interaction and information exchange between applications or operating systems and users. It realizes the internal form of information and the form acceptable to users. Conversion between. The commonly used form of user interface is a graphical user interface (GUI), which refers to a user interface related to computer operations that is displayed in a graphical manner. It can be an icon, window, control and other interface elements displayed on the display screen of an electronic device. The control can include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, Widgets, etc. Visual interface elements.
图2A示例性示出了电子设备100上的用于展示电子设备100安装的应用程序的示例性用户界面21。FIG. 2A exemplarily shows an exemplary user interface 21 on the electronic device 100 for displaying application programs installed by the electronic device 100.
用户界面21可包括:状态栏201,日历指示符202,天气指示符203,具有常用应用程序图标的托盘204,导航栏205,以及其他应用程序图标。其中:The user interface 21 may include: a status bar 201, a calendar indicator 202, a weather indicator 203, a tray 204 with commonly used application icons, a navigation bar 205, and other application icons. among them:
状态栏201可包括:移动通信信号(又可称为蜂窝信号)的一个或多个信号强度指示符201A、运营商名称(例如“中国移动”)201B、无线高保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)信号的一个或多个信号强度指示符201C,电池状态指示符201D、时间指示符201E。The status bar 201 may include: one or more signal strength indicators 201A of mobile communication signals (also called cellular signals), the name of the operator (for example, "China Mobile") 201B, and wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) ) One or more signal strength indicators 201C, battery status indicator 201D, and time indicator 201E of the signal.
日历指示符202可用于指示当前时间,例如日期、星期几、时分信息等。The calendar indicator 202 can be used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, and so on.
天气指示符203可用于指示天气类型,例如多云转晴、小雨等,还可以用于指示气温等信息。The weather indicator 203 can be used to indicate the type of weather, such as cloudy to clear, light rain, etc., and can also be used to indicate information such as temperature.
具有常用应用程序图标的托盘204可展示:电话图标204A、联系人图标204B、短信图标204C、相机图标204D。The tray 204 with icons of commonly used application programs can display: a phone icon 204A, a contact icon 204B, a short message icon 204C, and a camera icon 204D.
导航栏205可包括:返回键205A、主屏幕键205B、多任务键205C等系统导航键。当检测到用户点击返回键205A时,电子设备100可显示当前页面的上一个页面。当检测到用户点击主屏幕键205B时,电子设备100可显示主界面。当检测到用户点击多任务键205C时,电子设备100可显示用户最近打开的任务。各导航键的命名还可以为其他,本申请对此不做限制。不限于虚拟按键,导航栏205中的各导航键也可以实现为物理按键。The navigation bar 205 may include system navigation keys such as a return key 205A, a home screen key 205B, and a multi-task key 205C. When detecting that the user clicks the return key 205A, the electronic device 100 may display the previous page of the current page. When it is detected that the user clicks the home button 205B, the electronic device 100 may display the home interface. When detecting that the user clicks on the multitasking key 205C, the electronic device 100 may display the task recently opened by the user. The naming of each navigation key can also be other, which is not limited in this application. It is not limited to virtual keys, and each navigation key in the navigation bar 205 can also be implemented as a physical key.
其他应用程序图标可例如:微信(Wechat)的图标206、QQ的图标207、推特(Twitter)的图标208、脸书(Facebook)的图标209、邮箱的图标210、云共享的图标211、备忘录的图标212、支付宝的图标213、图库的图标214、设置的图标215。用户界面21还可包括页面指示符216。其他应用程序图标可分布在多个页面,页面指示符216可用于指示用户当前浏览的是哪一个页面中的应用程序。用户可以左右滑动其他应用程序图标的区域,来浏览其他页面中的应用程序图标。Other application icons can be for example: Wechat icon 206, QQ icon 207, Twitter icon 208, Facebook icon 209, mailbox icon 210, cloud sharing icon 211, memo The icon 212 of, the icon 213 of Alipay, the icon 214 of gallery, and the icon 215 of settings. The user interface 21 may also include a page indicator 216. Other application program icons may be distributed on multiple pages, and the page indicator 216 may be used to indicate which application program in which page the user is currently browsing. The user can slide the area of other application icons left and right to browse application icons in other pages.
在一些实施例中,图2A示例性所示的用户界面21可以为主界面(Home screen)。In some embodiments, the user interface 21 exemplarily shown in FIG. 2A may be a home screen.
在其他一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以包括实体的主屏幕键。该主屏幕键可用于接收用户的指令,将当前显示的UI返回到主界面,这样可以方便用户随时查看主屏幕。上述指令具体可以是用户单次按下主屏幕键的操作指令,也可以是用户在短时间内连续两次按下主屏幕键的操作指令,还可以是用户在预定时间内长按主屏幕键的操作指令。在本申请其他一些实施例中,主屏幕键还可以集成指纹识别器,以便用于在按下主屏幕键的时候,随之进行指纹采集和识别。In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also include a physical home screen key. The home screen key can be used to receive instructions from the user and return the currently displayed UI to the main interface, so that the user can view the home screen at any time. The above instruction can be an operation instruction for the user to press the home screen key once, or an operation instruction for the user to press the home screen key twice in a short period of time, or the user long press the home screen key within a predetermined time Operation instructions. In some other embodiments of the present application, the home screen key can also be integrated with a fingerprint recognizer, so that when the home screen key is pressed, fingerprints are collected and recognized.
可以理解的是,图2A仅仅示例性示出了电子设备100上的用户界面,不应构成对本申请实施例的限定。It can be understood that FIG. 2A only exemplarily shows the user interface on the electronic device 100, and should not constitute a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的几种开启电子设备100上的“功能助手”的方式。The following describes several ways of opening the "function assistant" on the electronic device 100 provided by the embodiments of the present application.
图2A及图2B示例性示出了电子设备100上的一种开启“功能助手”的操作。2A and FIG. 2B exemplarily show an operation of turning on the "function assistant" on the electronic device 100.
如图2A所示,当电子设备检测到在状态栏201上的向下滑动手势时,响应于该手势,电子设备100可以在用户界面21上显示窗口217。如图2B所示,窗口217中可以显示有“功能助手”的开关控件217A,还可以显示有其他功能(如Wi-Fi、蓝牙、手电筒等等)的开关控件。当检测到在窗口217中的开关控件217A上的操作(如在开关控件217A上的触摸操作) 时,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以开启“功能助手”。As shown in FIG. 2A, when the electronic device detects a downward sliding gesture on the status bar 201, the electronic device 100 may display a window 217 on the user interface 21 in response to the gesture. As shown in FIG. 2B, the window 217 may display the switch control 217A of the "function assistant", and may also display the switch control of other functions (such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, flashlight, etc.). When an operation on the switch control 217A in the window 217 (such as a touch operation on the switch control 217A) is detected, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may start the "function assistant".
也即是说,用户可以在状态栏201处做一个向下滑动的手势来打开窗口217,并可以在窗口217中点击“功能助手”的开关控件217A来方便地开启“功能助手”。“功能助手”的开关控件217A的表现形式可以为文本信息或者图标。In other words, the user can make a downward sliding gesture on the status bar 201 to open the window 217, and click the switch control 217A of the "function assistant" in the window 217 to conveniently open the "function assistant". The expression form of the switch control 217A of the "function assistant" can be text information or icons.
在本申请实施例中,通过图2A及图2B所示的操作来开启“功能助手”后,电子设备中安装的部分或者全部第三方应用具有使用该电子设备的增强功能的权限。该部分第三方应用可以是电子设备默认设置的;也可以是用户自主设置的,本申请实施例对此不做限制。In the embodiment of the present application, after the "function assistant" is turned on through the operations shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, some or all of the third-party applications installed in the electronic device have the authority to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device. This part of the third-party application may be set by the electronic device by default; it may also be set independently by the user, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
图3A-图3C示例性示出了电子设备100上的其他两种开启“功能助手”的操作。3A-3C exemplarily show the other two operations of opening the "function assistant" on the electronic device 100.
图3A示例性示出的用户界面31可以为“设置界面”的一种实现方式。该用户界面31可以是“设置”应用提供的。“设置”应用是安装于智能手机、平板电脑等电子设备上的一款用于设置电子设备的各项功能的应用程序,本申请实施例对该应用程序的名称不做限制。该用户界面31可以是用户点击图2A所示的用户界面21中的设置图标215打开的用户界面。The user interface 31 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3A may be an implementation of the "setting interface". The user interface 31 may be provided by the "settings" application. The "settings" application is an application installed on electronic devices such as smart phones, tablet computers and the like for setting various functions of the electronic device, and the name of the application is not limited in the embodiment of the application. The user interface 31 may be a user interface opened by the user clicking the setting icon 215 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A.
如图3A所示,用户界面31可包括:状态栏301、标题栏302、搜索框303、图标304、包括一个或多个设置项的区域305。As shown in FIG. 3A, the user interface 31 may include: a status bar 301, a title bar 302, a search box 303, an icon 304, and an area 305 including one or more setting items.
状态栏301可参照图2A所示的用户界面21中的状态栏201,这里不再赘述。The status bar 301 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
标题栏302可包括当前页面指示符302A,当前页面指示符302A可用于指示当前页面,例如文本信息“设置”可用于指示当前页面用于展示一个或多个设置项。不限于文本信息,当前页面指示符302A还可以是图标。The title bar 302 may include a current page indicator 302A. The current page indicator 302A may be used to indicate the current page. For example, the text information "settings" may be used to indicate that the current page is used to display one or more setting items. Not limited to text information, the current page indicator 302A may also be an icon.
搜索框303可用于监听通过文本搜索设置项的操作(如触摸操作)。响应于该操作,电子设备可显示文本输入框,使得用户在输入框中显示想要搜索的设置项。The search box 303 can be used to monitor an operation (such as a touch operation) of searching a setting item through text. In response to this operation, the electronic device may display a text input box, so that the user displays the setting item that the user wants to search for in the input box.
图标304可用于监听通过语音搜索设置项的操作(如触摸操作)。响应于该操作,电子设备可显示语音输入界面,使得用户在该语音输入界面中输入语音,从而搜索设置项。The icon 304 can be used to monitor an operation (such as a touch operation) of searching a setting item by voice. In response to this operation, the electronic device may display a voice input interface, so that the user inputs voice in the voice input interface, thereby searching for setting items.
区域305包括一个或多个设置项,该一个或多个设置项可包括:登录华为账号设置项、无线和网络设置项、设备连接设置项、应用和通知设置项、电池设置项、显示设置项、声音设置项、功能助手设置项305A、安全和隐私设置项、用户和账号设置项等。各个设置项的表现形式可包括图标和/或文本,本申请对此不做限制。各个设置项可用于监听触发显示对应设置项的设置内容的操作(如触摸操作),响应于该操作,电子设备可打开用于显示对应设置项的设置内容的用户界面。The area 305 includes one or more setting items. The one or more setting items may include: login Huawei account setting items, wireless and network setting items, device connection setting items, application and notification setting items, battery setting items, display setting items , Sound settings, function assistant settings 305A, security and privacy settings, user and account settings, etc. The expression form of each setting item may include icons and/or text, which is not limited in this application. Each setting item can be used to monitor an operation (such as a touch operation) that triggers the display of the setting content of the corresponding setting item, and in response to the operation, the electronic device can open a user interface for displaying the setting content of the corresponding setting item.
在一些实施例中,检测到在如图3A所示的用户界面31中功能助手设置项305A上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可显示如图3B所示的用户界面32。In some embodiments, an operation (such as a touch operation) on the function assistant setting item 305A in the user interface 31 shown in FIG. 3A is detected, and the electronic device may display the user interface 32 shown in FIG. 3B.
如图3B所示,用户界面32用于显示功能助手设置项的对应内容。该用户界面32可包括:状态栏306、标题栏307、“功能助手”的开关控件308、提示信息309。As shown in FIG. 3B, the user interface 32 is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items. The user interface 32 may include: a status bar 306, a title bar 307, a switch control 308 of the "function assistant", and prompt information 309.
状态栏306可参照图2A所示的用户界面21中的状态栏201,这里不再赘述。The status bar 306 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
标题栏307可包括:返回键307A、当前页面指示符307B和307C。返回键307A为APP级返回键,可用于返回菜单上一级。用户界面32的上一级页面可以为如图3A所示的用户界面31。当前页面指示符307B和307C可用于指示当前页面,例如文本信息“设置”“功能助手”可用于指示当前页面用于展示功能助手设置项的对应内容,不限于文本信息,当前页面指示符307B和307C还可以是图标。The title bar 307 may include: a return key 307A, current page indicators 307B and 307C. The return key 307A is an APP-level return key, which can be used to return to the upper level of the menu. The upper level page of the user interface 32 may be the user interface 31 as shown in FIG. 3A. The current page indicators 307B and 307C can be used to indicate the current page. For example, the text information "settings" and "function assistant" can be used to indicate that the current page is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items. It is not limited to text information. The current page indicator 307B and 307C can also be an icon.
开关控件308用于监听开启/关闭“功能助手”的操作(例如触摸操作)。如图3B所示, 当检测到在开关控件308上的操作(如在开关控件308上的触摸操作)时,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以开启“功能助手”。开关控件308的表现形式可以为文本信息或者图标。The switch control 308 is used to monitor the operation (for example, touch operation) of turning on/off the "function assistant". As shown in FIG. 3B, when an operation on the switch control 308 (such as a touch operation on the switch control 308) is detected, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can start the "function assistant". The form of the switch control 308 may be text information or icons.
提示信息309可用于介绍“功能助手”,提示用户“功能助手”的作用。提示信息309的表现形式可以为文本信息或者图标。The prompt message 309 can be used to introduce the "function assistant" and prompt the user of the function of the "function assistant". The presentation form of the prompt information 309 may be text information or icons.
在本申请实施例中,和通过上述图2A及图2B所示的操作来开启“功能助手”相同,通过图3B所示的操作来开启“功能助手”后,电子设备中安装的部分或者全部第三方应用具有使用该电子设备的增强功能的权限。该部分第三方应用可以是电子设备默认设置的,也可以是用户自主设置的,本申请实施例对此不做限制。In the embodiment of the present application, it is the same as opening the "function assistant" through the operation shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B. After the "function assistant" is turned on through the operation shown in FIG. 3B, part or all of the electronic equipment is installed The third-party application has the authority to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device. This part of the third-party application may be set by the electronic device by default, or may be set independently by the user, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在另一些实施例中,检测到在如图3A所示的用户界面31中功能助手设置项305A上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可显示如图3C所示的用户界面33。In other embodiments, when an operation (such as a touch operation) on the function assistant setting item 305A in the user interface 31 shown in FIG. 3A is detected, the electronic device may display the user interface 33 shown in FIG. 3C.
如图3C所示,用户界面33用于显示功能助手设置项的对应内容。该用户界面33可包括:状态栏310、标题栏311、提示信息312、一个或多个第三方应用分别对应的“功能助手”开关控件313-316。As shown in FIG. 3C, the user interface 33 is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items. The user interface 33 may include: a status bar 310, a title bar 311, prompt information 312, and "function assistant" switch controls 313-316 respectively corresponding to one or more third-party applications.
状态栏310可参照图2A所示的用户界面21中的状态栏201,这里不再赘述。The status bar 310 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
标题栏311可包括:返回键311A、当前页面指示符311B和311C。返回键311A为APP级返回键,可用于返回菜单上一级。用户界面33的上一级页面可以为如图3A所示的用户界面31。当前页面指示符311B和311C可用于指示当前页面,例如文本信息“设置”“功能助手”可用于指示当前页面用于展示功能助手设置项的对应内容,不限于文本信息,当前页面指示符311B和311C还可以是图标。The title bar 311 may include: a return key 311A, current page indicators 311B and 311C. The return key 311A is an APP-level return key, which can be used to return to the upper level of the menu. The upper level page of the user interface 33 may be the user interface 31 as shown in FIG. 3A. The current page indicators 311B and 311C can be used to indicate the current page. For example, the text information "settings" and "function assistant" can be used to indicate that the current page is used to display the corresponding content of the function assistant setting items. It is not limited to text information. The current page indicator 311B and 311C can also be an icon.
提示信息312可参照图3B所示的用户界面32中的提示信息309,这里不再赘述。For the prompt information 312, refer to the prompt information 309 in the user interface 32 shown in FIG. 3B, which will not be repeated here.
一个或多个第三方应用分别对应的“功能助手”开关控件313-316,可用于监听开启/关闭“功能助手”的操作(例如触摸操作)。该一个或多个第三方应用可以是电子设备中安装的全部第三方应用。如图3C所示,当检测到在开关控件313-316上的操作(如在开关控件313-316上的触摸操作)时,响应于该操作,电子设备可以开启/关闭对应的第三方应用使用电子设备的增强功能的权限。例如,如图3C所示,当检测到在开关控件316上的操作时,电子设备可以允许第三方应用脸书(Facebook)使用该电子设备具备的部分或全部增强功能。开关控件313-316的表现形式可以为文本信息或者图标。The "function assistant" switch controls 313-316 respectively corresponding to one or more third-party applications can be used to monitor the operation (for example, touch operation) of turning on/off the "function assistant". The one or more third-party applications may be all third-party applications installed in the electronic device. As shown in Figure 3C, when an operation on the switch controls 313-316 (such as a touch operation on the switch controls 313-316) is detected, in response to the operation, the electronic device can turn on/off the corresponding third-party application. Permission for enhanced functions of electronic devices. For example, as shown in FIG. 3C, when an operation on the switch control 316 is detected, the electronic device may allow the third-party application Facebook (Facebook) to use some or all of the enhanced functions of the electronic device. The form of the switch controls 313-316 may be text information or icons.
在一些实施例中,电子设备通过如图3C所示的操作开启了第三方应用使用“功能助手”的权限后,该第三方应用被加入到“功能助手”白名单中。In some embodiments, after the electronic device activates the third-party application's permission to use the "functional assistant" through the operation shown in FIG. 3C, the third-party application is added to the "functional assistant" whitelist.
不限于在上述图2A-图2B、图3A-图3C中示出的几种开启“功能助手”的方式,在一些实施例中,还可以通过其他方式开启“功能助手”。在另一些实施例中,电子设备也可以默认开启“功能助手”,例如在开机后自动开启“功能助手”等。It is not limited to the several ways of opening the "functional assistant" shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 2A-2B and 3A-3C. In some embodiments, the "functional assistant" can also be opened in other ways. In some other embodiments, the electronic device may also enable the "function assistant" by default, for example, automatically enable the "function assistant" after being turned on.
在本申请一些实施例中,电子设备开启“功能助手”之后,还可以在状态栏201中显示“功能助手”已开启的提示信息。例如,在状态栏201中显示“功能助手”的图标或者直接显示文本“功能助手”等。In some embodiments of the present application, after the electronic device starts the "function assistant", it may also display a prompt message in the status bar 201 that the "function assistant" has been started. For example, the icon of "function assistant" is displayed in the status bar 201 or the text "function assistant" is directly displayed.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电子设备可以维护“功能助手”白名单,并将具有使用电子设备的增强功能的第三方应用添加到该“功能助手”白名单中。即,“功能助手”白名单中的第三方应用具有使用电子设备的增强功能的权限。如果电子设备通过图2A-图2B所示的方式 开启了“功能助手”,则该电子设备可以将部分或全部第三方应用添加到该“功能助手”白名单中。如果电子设备通过如图3A和图3B所示的方式开启了“功能助手”,则该电子设备可以将部分或全部第三方应用添加到该“功能助手”白名单中。如果电子设备通过图3A和图3C所示的方式开启了“功能助手”,则该电子设备可以将对应的第三方应用加入到“功能助手”白名单中。In some embodiments of the present application, the electronic device may maintain a "function assistant" white list, and add third-party applications with enhanced functions for using the electronic device to the "function assistant" white list. That is, the third-party applications in the "function assistant" whitelist have the authority to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device. If the electronic device activates the "functional assistant" in the manner shown in FIGS. 2A-2B, the electronic device can add some or all of the third-party applications to the whitelist of the "functional assistant". If the electronic device starts the "function assistant" in the manner shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the electronic device can add some or all of the third-party applications to the white list of the "function assistant". If the electronic device starts the "function assistant" in the manner shown in FIG. 3A and FIG. 3C, the electronic device can add the corresponding third-party application to the "function assistant" whitelist.
可理解的,不限于上述图2A-图2B、图3A-图3C中示出的几种开启“功能助手”的方式来开放部分或全部第三方应用使用电子设备的增强功能的权限,本申请实施例中还可以通过其他方式来开放第三方应用使用电子设备的增强功能的权限。例如,用户可以在每次新下载第三方应用时,为该第三方应用设置使用电子设备的增强功能的权限。It is understandable that it is not limited to the several ways of opening the "function assistant" shown in Figures 2A-2B and Figure 3A-Figure 3C to open some or all third-party applications to use the enhanced functions of electronic devices. This application In the embodiment, the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device can also be opened in other ways. For example, the user can set the permission for the third-party application to use the enhanced function of the electronic device every time the third-party application is newly downloaded.
下面结合两个不同的使用场景,介绍用户在使用第三方应用的过程中,通过“功能助手”来启用电子设备提供的增强功能时,电子设备100上实现的图形用户界面的一些实施例。The following describes some embodiments of the graphical user interface implemented on the electronic device 100 when a user uses a third-party application to enable enhanced functions provided by the electronic device through the "function assistant" in combination with two different usage scenarios.
(一)使用场景一:视频通话场景(1) Use scenario 1: Video call scenario
以下图4A-图4H示例性示出的UI实施例中,用户在操控电子设备上安装的第三方应用时,电子设备可以提供增强功能给用户使用。也就是说,电子设备上的第三方应用可以调用电子设备的增强功能。以下图4A-图4H实施例以使用场景为视频通话场景为例,来说明电子设备上的第三方应用调用电子设备的增强功能的方法。In the UI embodiments exemplarily shown in FIGS. 4A-4H below, when the user manipulates a third-party application installed on the electronic device, the electronic device may provide enhanced functions for the user to use. In other words, third-party applications on the electronic device can call enhanced functions of the electronic device. The following embodiments of FIGS. 4A to 4H take the use scene as a video call scene as an example to illustrate the method for the third-party application on the electronic device to invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device.
下面说明图4A-图4H示例性示出的电子设备上安装的第三方应用提供的“视频通话界面”。The "video call interface" provided by the third-party application installed on the electronic device exemplarily shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H is described below.
在一些实施例中,“视频通话界面”可以用于显示视频通话双方的图像、一个或多个视频通话时的相关控件。其中,视频通话的一方的图像(即电子设备本端用户的图像)可以是电子设备的摄像头193采集到的图像,该摄像头可以是前置摄像头,也可以是后置摄像头。视频通话的另一方的图像(即对端用户的图像)可以是电子设备通过提供该“视频通话界面”的第三方应用程序接收到的其他电子设备发送的图像。视频通话时的相关控件可用于接收用户操作(例如触摸操作),响应于该用户操作,电子设备可以执行以下一项或多项:从视频通话切换到语音通话、挂断该视频通话或转换摄像头等。In some embodiments, the "video call interface" may be used to display images of both parties in the video call, and one or more related controls during the video call. The image of the party in the video call (ie, the image of the user at the end of the electronic device) may be an image collected by the camera 193 of the electronic device, and the camera may be a front camera or a rear camera. The image of the other party of the video call (that is, the image of the opposite user) may be an image sent by another electronic device received by the electronic device through a third-party application that provides the "video call interface". Related controls during a video call can be used to receive user operations (such as touch operations). In response to the user operations, the electronic device can perform one or more of the following: switch from a video call to a voice call, hang up the video call, or switch the camera Wait.
图4A-图4H示例性示出的用户界面41可以为“视频通话界面”的一种实现方式。该用户界面41可以是即时通讯类第三方应用(例如微信(WeChat))提供的。在一些实施例中,该用户界面41可以是用户点击图2A中的微信图标206,并选择联系人发起视频通话之后打开的用户界面。在另一些实施例中,该用户界面41还可以是用户点击图2A中的微信图标206,并接受联系人发起的视频通话之后发开的用户界面。在又一些实施例中,还可以是用户通过语音唤起的用户界面。The user interface 41 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H may be an implementation of the "video call interface". The user interface 41 may be provided by an instant messaging third-party application (such as WeChat). In some embodiments, the user interface 41 may be a user interface opened after the user clicks the WeChat icon 206 in FIG. 2A and selects a contact to initiate a video call. In other embodiments, the user interface 41 may also be a user interface that is launched after the user clicks the WeChat icon 206 in FIG. 2A and accepts the video call initiated by the contact. In still other embodiments, it may also be a user interface awakened by the user through voice.
如图4A-图4H所示,用户界面41可包括:状态栏401、对端用户图像的显示区域402、本端用户图像的显示区域403、通话时长指示符404、控件405、控件406以及控件407。在一些实施例中,该用户界面41还可包括可隐藏的导航栏(图中未示出),该导航栏可参照图2A中的导航栏205。As shown in FIGS. 4A-4H, the user interface 41 may include: a status bar 401, a display area 402 of the peer user image, a display area 403 of the local user image, a call duration indicator 404, a control 405, a control 406, and a control 407. In some embodiments, the user interface 41 may further include a concealable navigation bar (not shown in the figure), and the navigation bar may refer to the navigation bar 205 in FIG. 2A.
状态栏401可参照图2A所示的用户界面21中的状态栏201,这里不再赘述。The status bar 401 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
对端用户图像的显示区域402用于显示视频通话的对端用户的图像。对端用户的图像是电子设备通过提供该用户界面41的第三方应用程序接收到的其他电子设备发送的图像。The display area 402 of the image of the opposite end user is used to display the image of the opposite end user of the video call. The image of the peer user is an image sent by another electronic device received by the electronic device through a third-party application that provides the user interface 41.
本端用户图像的显示区域403用于显示视频通话的本端用户的图像。本端用户的图像是电子设备的摄像头193采集到的图像。该摄像头为前置摄像头或后置摄像头。The display area 403 of the image of the local user is used to display the image of the local user of the video call. The image of the local user is the image collected by the camera 193 of the electronic device. The camera is a front camera or a rear camera.
通话时长指示符404用于指示视频通话的时长。通话时长指示符404可以为文本信息“00:50”,标识当前视频通话的时长为50秒。The call duration indicator 404 is used to indicate the duration of the video call. The call duration indicator 404 may be text information "00:50", which identifies that the duration of the current video call is 50 seconds.
控件405用于监听将视频通话切换为语音通话的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件405上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以将当前本端用户和对端用户之间的视频通话切换为语音通话。The control 405 is used to monitor the operation of switching the video call to the voice call. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on the control 405, the electronic device can switch the current video call between the local user and the opposite user to a voice call.
控件406用于监听挂断视频通话的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件406上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以将当前本端用户和对端用户之间的视频通话挂断。The control 406 is used to monitor the operation of hanging up the video call. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 406, the electronic device may hang up the current video call between the local user and the opposite user.
控件407用于监听转换摄像头的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件407上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以将转换当前开启的摄像头,例如将前置摄像头转换为后置摄像头,或者,将后置摄像头转换为前置摄像头等。The control 407 is used to monitor the operation of switching the camera. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 407, the electronic device can convert the currently turned on camera, for example, convert a front camera to a rear camera, or convert a rear camera to a front camera Wait.
控件405、控件406及控件407的表现形式可以为图标和/或文本信息。The manifestations of the control 405, the control 406, and the control 407 may be icons and/or text information.
在“功能助手”未开启的情况下,用户可以开启“功能助手”。用户可以在如图2B所示的窗口217中开启“功能助手”,也可以在图3B或图3C所示的设置界面中开启“功能助手”。可参照前文实施例的相关描述。不限于此,在一些实施例中,电子设备还可以默认开启“功能助手”。When the "Function Assistant" is not turned on, the user can turn on the "Function Assistant". The user can start the "function assistant" in the window 217 shown in FIG. 2B, or start the "function assistant" in the setting interface shown in FIG. 3B or 3C. Reference may be made to the relevant description of the previous embodiment. Not limited to this, in some embodiments, the electronic device may also enable the "function assistant" by default.
在一些实施例中,在“功能助手”未开启的情况下,即在电子设备当前启动的第三方应用不具有使用该电子设备的增强功能的权限时,电子设备显示如图4A所示的用户界面41时,还可以提示用户开启“功能助手”。电子设备提示用户开启“功能助手”的方式可包括但不限于:在用户界面41上显示提示信息(图中未示出)(例如文本信息、图标等)、发出提示音、振动等。In some embodiments, when the "function assistant" is not turned on, that is, when the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device does not have the authority to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the user as shown in FIG. 4A At the interface 41, the user may also be prompted to open the "function assistant". The way the electronic device prompts the user to open the "function assistant" may include, but is not limited to: displaying prompt information (not shown in the figure) (for example, text information, icons, etc.) on the user interface 41, emitting prompt sounds, vibrations, and so on.
在“功能助手”已开启的情况下,即在电子设备当前启动的第三方应用具有使用该电子设备的增强功能的权限时,电子设备可以显示如图4B所示的用户界面41。如图4B所示的用户界面41可包括用于介绍“功能助手”的小窗口408。电子设备可以在开启“功能助手”后,仅在首次打开第三方应用提供的用户界面时显示该小窗口408,也可以在每次打开第三方应用提供的用户界面时显示该小窗口408,本申请对此不做限制。When the "function assistant" is turned on, that is, when the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device has the authority to use the enhanced function of the electronic device, the electronic device may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4B. The user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4B may include a small window 408 for introducing the "function assistant". The electronic device may display the small window 408 only when the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened after the "function assistant" is turned on, or it may display the small window 408 each time the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened. There is no restriction on this application.
如图4B所示,小窗口408中包括:“功能助手”开启前的效果展示信息408A、“功能助手”开启后的效果展示信息408B、提示信息408C、控件408D和控件408E。As shown in FIG. 4B, the small window 408 includes: effect display information 408A before the "function assistant" is started, effect display information 408B after the "function assistant" is started, prompt information 408C, control 408D, and control 408E.
效果展示信息408A和408B可以呈现“功能助手”开启前后带来的不同效果,使用户直观地感受“功能助手”的作用。效果展示信息408A和408B的表现形式可以为图片和/或文本。The effect display information 408A and 408B can present different effects before and after the "function assistant" is turned on, so that the user can intuitively feel the function of the "function assistant". The presentation form of the effect display information 408A and 408B may be pictures and/or text.
提示信息408C用于介绍“功能助手”的功能及开启方式。提示信息408C的表现形式可以为文本,例如图4B中所示的文本。The prompt message 408C is used to introduce the function and opening method of the "function assistant". The presentation form of the prompt information 408C may be text, such as the text shown in FIG. 4B.
控件408D可用于监听停止显示该小窗口408并关闭当前打开的第三方应用使用电子设备的增强功能的权限的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件408D上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以停止显示小窗口408,并且关闭当前打开的第三方应用(例如微信(WeChat))使用电子设备的增强功能的权限。在一些实施例中,电子设备可以仅关闭本次该第三方应用使用电子设备的增强功能的权限,在下一次打开该第三方应用时恢复该第三方应用使用电子 设备的增强功能的权限。在另一些实施例中,电子设备可以关闭该第三方应用使用电子设备的增强功能的权限,将该第三方应用移出“功能助手”白名单。控件408D的表现形式可以为图标或文本(例如图4B中的文本“取消”)。The control 408D can be used to monitor the operation of stopping the display of the small window 408 and closing the currently opened third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on the control 408D, the electronic device can stop displaying the small window 408, and close the currently open third-party application (such as WeChat) permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device . In some embodiments, the electronic device may only close the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device this time, and restore the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device when the third-party application is opened next time. In other embodiments, the electronic device may close the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device, and remove the third-party application from the whitelist of the "function assistant". The manifestation of the control 408D may be an icon or text (for example, the text "Cancel" in FIG. 4B).
控件408E可用于监听停止显示该小窗口408并呈现电子设备提供的增强功能的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件408E上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以停止显示小窗口408,并且呈现电子设备当前提供的增强功能。控件408D的表现形式可以为图标或文本(例如图4B中的文本“开始体验”)。The control 408E can be used to monitor the operation of stopping the display of the small window 408 and presenting the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 408E, the electronic device may stop displaying the small window 408 and present the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device. The manifestation of the control 408D may be an icon or text (for example, the text "Start Experience" in FIG. 4B).
图4C-图4H示例性示出的用户界面41可以为电子设备呈现提供的增强功能的一种实现方式。The user interface 41 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 4C-4H may present an implementation manner of enhanced functions provided for the electronic device.
响应于检测到的作用于控件408E上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以显示如图4C所示的用户界面41。如图4C所示,该用户界面41中可包括控件409。控件409可用于监听展开显示电子设备当前可以提供的增强功能所对应的控件的操作。控件409的表现形式可以包括图标和/或文本。不限于在用户界面41的右侧中间位置显示控件409,还可以在其他位置例如屏幕左侧中间位置、屏幕上方中间位置等显示该控件409。在一些实施例中,控件409还可以被用户拖动到屏幕的任意位置。在一些实施例中,图4C所示的用户界面还可以包括提示信息410。提示信息410可用于提示用户查看电子设备当前提供的增强功能的方式,例如图4C中以气泡形式展示的文本“点击图标,可查看更多功能”。电子设备可以仅仅在第一次在用户界面41上显示控件409时显示该提示信息410,也可以在每一次在用户界面41上显示控件409时显示该提示信息410,本申请对此不做限制。不限于提示信息410,在其他一些实施例中,电子设备还可以通过语音等方式来提示用户查看电子设备当前提供的增强功能的方式。In response to the detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 408E, the electronic device may display a user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4C. As shown in FIG. 4C, the user interface 41 may include a control 409. The control 409 can be used to monitor and expand the operation of the control corresponding to the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device. The representation form of the control 409 may include icons and/or text. It is not limited to displaying the control 409 in the middle right position of the user interface 41, and the control 409 may also be displayed in other positions such as the middle position on the left side of the screen, the middle position on the top of the screen, and so on. In some embodiments, the control 409 can also be dragged by the user to any position on the screen. In some embodiments, the user interface shown in FIG. 4C may further include prompt information 410. The prompt information 410 may be used to prompt the user to view the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, such as the text "click on the icon to view more functions" displayed in the form of bubbles in FIG. 4C. The electronic device may only display the prompt information 410 when the control 409 is displayed on the user interface 41 for the first time, or it may display the prompt information 410 each time the control 409 is displayed on the user interface 41, which is not limited in this application . It is not limited to the prompt information 410. In some other embodiments, the electronic device may also prompt the user to view the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device by means of voice or the like.
这里,电子设备当前提供的增强功能的确定方式可以有以下几种:1.电子设备当前提供的增强功能可以是该电子设备所具备的全部增强功能。2.电子设备当前提供的增强功能可以是当前启动的第三方应用(例如微信(WeChat))所能够使用的增强功能。3.电子设备当前提供的增强功能可以适用于当前使用场景(例如视频通话场景)的增强功能。后续实施例将详细描述电子设备运行第三方应用时提供的增强功能的确定方式,在此暂不赘述。Here, the methods for determining the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be as follows: 1. The enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be all enhanced functions of the electronic device. 2. The enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be an enhanced function that can be used by a currently launched third-party application (such as WeChat). 3. The enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be applicable to the enhanced function of the current use scene (for example, a video call scene). Subsequent embodiments will describe in detail the method for determining the enhanced function provided when the electronic device runs a third-party application, and will not be repeated here.
图4D所示的用户界面41示出了电子设备展开显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件的一种实现方式。在图4D实施例中,电子设备当前提供的增强功能包括:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能和“虚化”功能。该用户界面41,可以是电子设备响应于检测到的作用于图4C所示的控件409上的操作(例如点击操作)而打开的用户界面。该用户界面41,也可以用户点击图2A中的微信图标206,并选择联系人发起视频通话之后或者接受联系人发起的视频通话之后打开的用户界面,还可以是电子设备响应于用户的语音而打开的用户界面。The user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4D shows an implementation manner in which the electronic device expands and displays the control corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function. In the embodiment of FIG. 4D, the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device include: a "beauty" function, a "beauty" function, and a "blur" function. The user interface 41 may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (for example, a click operation) acting on the control 409 shown in FIG. 4C. The user interface 41 can also be the user interface opened after the user clicks the WeChat icon 206 in Figure 2A and selects the contact to initiate a video call or accepts the video call initiated by the contact, or the electronic device responds to the user’s voice. The opened user interface.
如图4D所示,该用户界面41可包括:控件411A、控件411B和控件411C。As shown in FIG. 4D, the user interface 41 may include: a control 411A, a control 411B, and a control 411C.
控件411A用于监听开启“美颜”功能的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件411A上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可以开启“美颜”功能。“美颜”功能可用于在当前的视频通话界面中对拍摄到的本端用户的脸部图像进行美化处理,该美化处理可包括例如皮肤美白、皮肤磨皮(如去除人物脸上的痘痘、雀斑、皱纹等),等等。The control 411A is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "beauty" function. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 411A, the electronic device can turn on the "beauty" function. The "beauty" function can be used to beautify the captured face image of the local user in the current video call interface. The beautification process can include skin whitening, skin dermabrasion (such as removing acne on a person’s face) , Freckles, wrinkles, etc.), etc.
控件411B用于监听开启“美体”功能的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件411B上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可以开启“美体”功能。“美体”功能可用于在当前的视频通话 界面中对拍摄到的本端用户的身体图像进行美化处理,该美化处理可包括例如美化身体比例(如拉长腿部、扩宽肩部等)、对身体的胖瘦进行调整(如瘦腰、瘦腿、瘦肚子、瘦臀部或对身体局部进行丰满处理,等等。The control 411B is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "Beauty" function. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 411B, the electronic device may turn on the "beauty" function. The "Beauty" function can be used to beautify the body image of the local user captured in the current video call interface. The beautification can include, for example, beautifying the body proportions (such as lengthening legs, widening shoulders, etc.), Adjust the body's fatness and thinness (such as thin waist, thin legs, thin belly, thin buttocks, or plump parts of the body, etc.).
控件411C用于监听开启“虚化”功能的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件411C上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可以开启“虚化”功能。“虚化”功能可用于在当前的视频通话界面中对拍摄到的本端用户的图像进行虚化处理,该虚化处理可包括例如使图像的景深变浅,使焦点聚集在主题上,等等。The control 411C is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "blur" function. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 411C, the electronic device can turn on the "blur" function. The "blur" function can be used to blur the captured image of the local user in the current video call interface. The blur can include, for example, making the image's depth of field shallow, focusing on the subject, etc. Wait.
控件411A、控件411B和控件411C的表现形式可以包括图标和/或文本。不限于控件411A-控件411C,电子设备还可以提供其他增强功能对应的控件,本申请对此不做限制。The manifestations of the control 411A, the control 411B, and the control 411C may include icons and/or text. It is not limited to controls 411A-411C, and the electronic device may also provide controls corresponding to other enhanced functions, which is not limited in this application.
在一些实施例中,图4D所示的用户界面41还可包括和控件411A、控件411B、控件411C分别对应的提示信息411D、提示信息411E、提示信息411F。这些提示信息可用于介绍对应控件所对应的增强功能。例如,提示信息411D用于介绍控件411A对应的增强功能为“美颜”功能,提示信息411E用于介绍控件411B对应的增强功能为“美体”功能,提示信息411F用于介绍控件411C对应的增强功能为“虚化”功能。提示信息411D-411F的表现形式可以为以气泡形式展示的文本。电子设备可以仅仅在第一次在用户界面41上显示控件411A-411C时显示该提示信息411D-411F,也可以在每一次在用户界面41上显示控件411A-411C时显示该提示信息411D-411F,本申请对此不做限制。In some embodiments, the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4D may further include prompt information 411D, prompt information 411E, and prompt information 411F corresponding to the control 411A, the control 411B, and the control 411C, respectively. These prompt messages can be used to introduce the enhanced functions of the corresponding control. For example, the prompt message 411D is used to introduce the enhancement function corresponding to the control 411A as the "beauty" function, the prompt message 411E is used to introduce the enhancement function corresponding to the control 411B as the "beauty" function, and the prompt information 411F is used to introduce the enhancement corresponding to the control 411C. The function is a "blur" function. The presentation form of the prompt information 411D-411F may be text displayed in the form of bubbles. The electronic device may only display the prompt information 411D-411F when the controls 411A-411C are displayed on the user interface 41 for the first time, or may display the prompt information 411D-411F each time the controls 411A-411C are displayed on the user interface 41 , This application does not restrict this.
图4E示例性示出的用户界面41可以为第三方应用调用或启用电子设备提供的“美体”功能的一种实现方式。The user interface 41 exemplarily shown in FIG. 4E may be an implementation manner for a third-party application to call or enable the "beauty" function provided by the electronic device.
参见图4E,图4E所示的用户界面41可以是电子设备响应于检测到的作用于图4D所示的控件411B上的操作(例如点击操作)而打开的用户界面。如图4E所示,该用户界面41中可包括:“美体”图标412A、控件412B、美体级别指示符412C。Referring to FIG. 4E, the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4E may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (such as a click operation) acting on the control 411B shown in FIG. 4D. As shown in FIG. 4E, the user interface 41 may include: a "beauty" icon 412A, a control 412B, and a beautification level indicator 412C.
“美体”图标412A可用于指示当前用户选择启用的增强功能包括“美体”功能。在一些实施例中,“美体”图标还可以被高亮显示,用于指示当前用户选择使用的增强功能包括“美体功能”。不限于高亮显示,“美体”图标还可以呈现其他的显示状态(例如下划线或加阴影等),以指示当前选择的增强功能包括“美体”功能。The "Beauty" icon 412A may be used to indicate that the enhanced function selected by the current user includes the "Beauty" function. In some embodiments, the “beauty” icon may also be highlighted to indicate that the enhanced function currently selected by the user includes the “beauty function”. Not limited to highlighting, the "Beauty" icon can also present other display states (for example, underlined or shaded, etc.) to indicate that the currently selected enhanced function includes the "Beauty" function.
控件412B可以是滑动条。控件412B可用于接收用户对被拍摄人物(即视频通话的本端用户)的美体程度的调节操作,该调节操作可以是作用于控件412B上的滑动操作。这里,美体程度可以是指对被拍摄人物的身体进行体型美化的美化程度。美体程度又可以称为美体级别。例如,可以有美体级别0至美体级别10共11个美美体级别,美体级别越高,体型美化的美化程度越高;美体级别0可表示对被拍摄人物的身体图像不进行美体处理,此时本端用户图像的显示区域403中显示的被拍摄人物的身体图像表现的体型和被拍摄人物的实际体型一致,即没有发生体型美化;美体级别10可表示对被拍摄人物的身体进行较大程度的体型美化,此时本端用户图像的显示区域403中显示的被拍摄人物的身体图像表现的体型相较于被拍摄人物的实际体型发生了较大程度的体型美化。The control 412B may be a slider. The control 412B can be used to receive a user's adjustment operation on the degree of beauty of the photographed person (ie, the local user of the video call), and the adjustment operation can be a sliding operation on the control 412B. Here, the beautification degree may refer to the beautification degree for beautifying the body of the person being photographed. The degree of beauty can also be called the level of beauty. For example, there can be a total of 11 body beautification levels from body level 0 to body level 10. The higher the body level, the higher the beautification degree of body beautification; the body level 0 can indicate that the body image of the photographed person is not subject to beautification processing. The body image of the photographed person displayed in the display area 403 of the local user image shows the same body shape as the actual body shape of the photographed person, that is, no body shape beautification occurs; the beauty level 10 can indicate a greater degree of the body of the photographed person Body shape beautification. At this time, the body shape of the photographed person displayed in the display area 403 of the local user's image has a greater degree of body shape beautification than the actual body shape of the photographed person.
美体级别指示符412C用于指示当前用户选择的美体程度。美体级别指示符412C的表现形式可以为文本,例如图4E中的文本“7”,可用于指示用户当前选择的美体级别为7。如图4E所示,和图4A-图4D中相比,本端用户图像的显示区域403中显示的被拍摄人物的身体图像被美化处理。The body level indicator 412C is used to indicate the body level selected by the current user. The appearance form of the body level indicator 412C may be text, for example, the text "7" in FIG. 4E can be used to indicate that the body level currently selected by the user is 7. As shown in FIG. 4E, compared with FIGS. 4A to 4D, the body image of the photographed person displayed in the display area 403 of the local user image is beautified.
图4F所示的用户界面41可以是电子设备停止显示或者收起显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件或其他交互元素的一种实现方式。在一些实施例中,在预设时间内,如果电子设备没有在如图4E所示的用户界面41的控件412B上接收到用户操作,则可以显示如图4F所示的用户界面41。在另一些实施例中,电子设备可以响应于检测到的在如图4E所示的用户界面41上空白区域的操作(如触摸操作),显示如图4F所示的用户界面41。这里,用户界面41上的空白区域可以是指除控件以及其他交互元素之外的其他区域,例如可以是本端用户图像显示区域403。The user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4F may be an implementation manner in which the electronic device stops displaying or retracts to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function. In some embodiments, within a preset time, if the electronic device does not receive a user operation on the control 412B of the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4E, it may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4F. In other embodiments, the electronic device may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4F in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on a blank area on the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4E. Here, the blank area on the user interface 41 may refer to other areas except controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the local user image display area 403.
如图4F所示,该用户界面41可以停止显示或者收起显示电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件或其他交互元素,即停止显示“美体”图标412A、控件412B以及美体级别指示符412C,并且显示控件409。图4F中的控件409和图4C中所示的控件409相同,可参考图4C实施例的相关描述。As shown in FIG. 4F, the user interface 41 can stop displaying or retract the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, that is, stop displaying the "beauty" icon 412A, the control 412B, and the beautification level indicator 412C , And display control 409. The control 409 in FIG. 4F is the same as the control 409 shown in FIG. 4C, and reference may be made to the related description of the embodiment in FIG. 4C.
在一些实施例中,电子设备还可以停止显示控件409。图4F-图4H示出了一种电子设备停止显示409的一种实现方式。In some embodiments, the electronic device may also stop displaying the control 409. 4F-4H show an implementation manner of stopping the display 409 of an electronic device.
图4F中的控件409还可以用于监听停止该控件409的操作(例如长按手势)。响应于作用于如图4F所示的控件409上的操作(例如长按手势),电子设备可以显示如图4G中的控件414,控件414可用于接收用户操作(例如长按手势),电子设备可响应于在控件414上接收到的用户操作停止显示该控件409。示例性地,电子设备响应于在控件414上接收到的用户操作后,可显示如图4H所示的用户界面41,该用户界面41中不再显示控件409。这里,虽然电子设备不再在如图4H所示的用户界面41上显示控件409,但是电子设备仍然持续提供增强功能并持续启用用户选择的增强功能。隐藏用户界面41中的控件409后,电子设备可以有更多的显示区域用于显示对端用户图像或本端用户图像,可以方便用户更好地进行视频通话,体验更佳。The control 409 in FIG. 4F can also be used to monitor the operation of stopping the control 409 (for example, a long press gesture). In response to an operation (such as a long press gesture) on the control 409 shown in FIG. 4F, the electronic device may display the control 414 shown in FIG. 4G, and the control 414 may be used to receive user operations (such as a long press gesture). The display of the control 409 may be stopped in response to a user operation received on the control 414. Illustratively, after the electronic device responds to the user operation received on the control 414, it may display the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4H, and the control 409 is no longer displayed in the user interface 41. Here, although the electronic device no longer displays the control 409 on the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4H, the electronic device still continues to provide enhanced functions and continues to enable the enhanced functions selected by the user. After hiding the control 409 in the user interface 41, the electronic device can have more display areas for displaying the image of the peer user or the image of the local user, which can facilitate the user to make a better video call and have a better experience.
在一些实施例中,图4F中还可包括提示信息413。提示信息413可用于提示用户停止显示控件409的方式,例如图4F中以气泡形式展示的文本“长按图标,可隐藏功能助手”。In some embodiments, the prompt information 413 may also be included in FIG. 4F. The prompt message 413 can be used to prompt the user to stop displaying the control 409, for example, the text "Long press the icon to hide the function assistant" displayed in the form of a bubble in FIG. 4F.
在一些实施例中,用户隐藏控件409之后,如果想要再次查看控件409并通过控件409使用或启用电子设备提供的增强功能,则可以通过用户操作重新调出该控件409。用于重新调出该控件409的用户操作可以是:作用于如图4H所示的用户界面41中的空白区域上的操作(如触摸操作或点击操作)。这里,空白区域可以是指除控件以及其他交互元素之外的其他区域,例如可以是本端用户图像显示区域403。In some embodiments, after the user hides the control 409, if the user wants to view the control 409 again and use or enable the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device through the control 409, the control 409 can be called up again through user operations. The user operation for re-calling the control 409 may be an operation (such as a touch operation or a click operation) acting on a blank area in the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 4H. Here, the blank area may refer to areas other than controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the image display area 403 of the local user.
不限于图4A-图4H所示,“视频通话界面”的页面布局还可以呈现其他形式,本申请实施例对此不做限制。不限于第三方应用微信(WeChat),其他社交通讯类第三方应用(例如Skype、WhatsApp等)也可以提供类似的“视频通话界面”,在这些第三方应用提供“视频通话界面”时,电子设备也可以通过和上述图4A-图4H类似的方法提供增强功能。Not limited to those shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H, the page layout of the "video call interface" may also present other forms, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Not limited to the third-party application WeChat (WeChat), other social communication third-party applications (such as Skype, WhatsApp, etc.) can also provide a similar "video call interface". When these third-party applications provide a "video call interface", electronic devices The enhanced function can also be provided by a method similar to the above-mentioned Figure 4A-4H.
不限于图4D示出的电子设备响应于检测到的作用于控件409上的操作来展开显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件的实现方式,本申请实施例还可以通过其他方式来使得电子设备展开显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件,例如用户还可以通过滑动调出侧边栏、下拉栏或者上拉栏的方式来查看电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件。用户通过滑动调出侧边栏来查看电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件时,本申请对滑动方向不做限制。It is not limited to the implementation manner in which the electronic device shown in FIG. 4D expands and displays the control corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function in response to the detected operation on the control 409. The embodiment of the present application may also make the electronic device in other ways Expand to display the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided. For example, the user can also view the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device by sliding to call up the sidebar, drop-down bar, or pull-up bar. When the user slides to call up the sidebar to view the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, the application does not limit the sliding direction.
图5D-图5F示例性示出的UI实施例中,用户可以通过向左滑动的手势调出侧边栏,查看电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件。下面说明图5D-图5F示例性示出的用户界面。In the UI embodiments exemplarily shown in FIGS. 5D-5F, the user can call up the sidebar through a gesture of sliding to the left, and view the controls corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device. The user interface exemplarily shown in FIGS. 5D to 5F will be described below.
图5A-图5B示例性所示的用户界面51可以参考图4A-图4B所示的用户界面41,在此不再赘述。The user interface 51 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 5A to 5B may refer to the user interface 41 shown in FIGS. 4A to 4B, which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中,响应于检测到的作用于如图5B所示的文本“开始体验”上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以显示如图5C所示的用户界面51。如图5C所示,该用户界面51可包括提示信息501。提示信息501可用于提示用户查看电子设备当前提供的增强功能的方式,例如图5C中以气泡形式展示的文本“向左滑动,可使用功能助手”。In some embodiments, in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the text "Start Experience" as shown in FIG. 5B, the electronic device may display a user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5C. As shown in FIG. 5C, the user interface 51 may include prompt information 501. The prompt information 501 may be used to prompt the user to view the enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device, for example, the text "swipe to the left, the function assistant can be used" displayed in the form of a bubble in FIG. 5C.
如图5C所示,电子设备可以检测到在屏幕上的向左滑动的操作,显示如图5D所示的用户界面51。图5D所示的用户界面51示出了电子设备展开显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件的一种实现方式。在图5D实施例中,电子设备当前提供的增强功能包括:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能和“虚化”功能。As shown in FIG. 5C, the electronic device can detect the leftward sliding operation on the screen, and display the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5D. The user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5D shows an implementation manner in which the electronic device expands and displays the control corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function. In the embodiment of FIG. 5D, the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device include: a "beauty" function, a "beauty" function, and a "blurred" function.
如图5D所示,该用户界面51包括:控件502A、控件502B和控件502C。控件502A、控件502B、控件502C可参考图4D中的控件411A、控件411B、控件411C,这里不再赘述。在一些实施例中,该用户界面51还可包括:提示信息502D、提示信息502E和提示信息502F。提示信息502D、提示信息502E、提示信息502F可参考图4D中的提示信息411D、提示信息411E、提示信息411F,这里不再赘述。As shown in FIG. 5D, the user interface 51 includes a control 502A, a control 502B, and a control 502C. For the control 502A, the control 502B, and the control 502C, please refer to the control 411A, the control 411B, and the control 411C in FIG. 4D, which will not be repeated here. In some embodiments, the user interface 51 may further include: prompt information 502D, prompt information 502E, and prompt information 502F. For the prompt information 502D, the prompt information 502E, and the prompt information 502F, please refer to the prompt information 411D, the prompt information 411E, and the prompt information 411F in FIG. 4D, which will not be repeated here.
图5E示例性示出的用户界面51可以为第三方应用调用或启用电子设备提供的“美体”功能的一种实现方式。参见图5E,图5E所示的用户界面51可以是电子设备响应于检测到的作用于图5D所示的控件502B上的操作(例如点击操作)而打开的用户界面。如图5E所示,该用户界面51中可包括:“美体”图标503A、控件503B、美体级别指示符503C。“美体”图标503A、控件503B、美体级别指示符503C可参照图4E中的“美体”图标412A、控件412B、美体级别指示符412C,这里不再赘述。The user interface 51 exemplarily shown in FIG. 5E can be an implementation manner for a third-party application to call or enable the "beauty" function provided by the electronic device. Referring to FIG. 5E, the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5E may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (such as a click operation) acting on the control 502B shown in FIG. 5D. As shown in FIG. 5E, the user interface 51 may include: a "beauty" icon 503A, a control 503B, and a beautification level indicator 503C. The "beauty" icon 503A, the control 503B, and the beautification level indicator 503C may refer to the "beauty" icon 412A, the control 412B, and the beautification level indicator 412C in FIG. 4E, which will not be repeated here.
图5F所示的用户界面51可以是电子设备停止显示或者收起显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件或其他交互元素的一种实现方式。在一些实施例中,在预设时间内,如果电子设备没有在如图5E所示的用户界面51的控件503B上接收到用户操作,则可以显示如图5F所示的用户界面51。在另一些实施例中,电子设备可以响应于检测到的在如图5E所示的用户界面51上空白区域的操作(如触摸操作),显示如图5F所示的用户界面51。这里,用户界面51上的空白区域可以是指除控件以及其他交互元素之外的其他区域,例如可以是本端用户图像显示区域。The user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5F may be an implementation manner in which the electronic device stops displaying or retracts to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function. In some embodiments, within a preset time, if the electronic device does not receive a user operation on the control 503B of the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5E, it may display the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5F. In other embodiments, the electronic device may display a user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5F in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on a blank area on the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 5E. Here, the blank area on the user interface 51 may refer to other areas other than controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the image display area of the local user.
如图5F所示,该用户界面51可以停止显示或者收起显示电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件或其他交互元素,即停止显示“美体”图标503A、控件503B以及美体级别指示符503C。As shown in FIG. 5F, the user interface 51 can stop displaying or retract to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, that is, stop displaying the "beauty" icon 503A, the control 503B, and the body level indicator 503C .
通过图4A-图4H或者图5A-图5F示例性示出的实施例,电子设备可以在视频通话场景下提供增强功能,即可以使得第三方应用在视频通话场景下调用电子设备的增强功能。也就是说,电子设备可以将增强功能扩展到第三方应用中,使得用户在使用第三方应用时也可以使用电子设备的增强功能。这样,用户在使用第三方应用时,可以充分利用电子设备的增强功能,用户体验佳。Through the exemplary embodiments shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H or 5A to 5F, the electronic device can provide enhanced functions in a video call scenario, that is, a third-party application can call the enhanced function of the electronic device in a video call scenario. In other words, the electronic device can extend the enhanced function to the third-party application, so that the user can also use the enhanced function of the electronic device when using the third-party application. In this way, users can make full use of the enhanced functions of electronic devices when using third-party applications, and the user experience is good.
不限于视频通话场景,电子设备使用第三方应用时,也可以在其他的使用场景下提供增 强功能。这些使用场景可包括电子设备安装的第三方应用所能提供的部分或者全部场景。示例性地,这些使用场景可包括但不限于:社交通讯场景(例如文字或语音聊天)、视频通话场景、视频播放场景、新闻资讯场景、视频录制场景、游戏场景、购物场景、直播场景或音频录制场景等。It is not limited to video call scenarios. When electronic devices use third-party applications, they can also provide enhanced functions in other usage scenarios. These usage scenarios may include some or all scenarios that can be provided by third-party applications installed on electronic devices. Exemplarily, these usage scenarios may include, but are not limited to: social communication scenarios (such as text or voice chat), video call scenarios, video playback scenarios, news information scenarios, video recording scenarios, game scenarios, shopping scenarios, live broadcast scenarios, or audio Recording scenes, etc.
(二)使用场景二:直播场景(2) Use scenario two: live broadcast scenario
以下图6A-图6H示例性示出的UI实施例中,用户在操控电子设备上安装的第三方应用时,电子设备可以提供增强功能给用户使用。也就是说,电子设备上的第三方应用可以调用电子设备的增强功能。以下图6A-图6H实施例以使用场景为直播场景为例,来说明电子设备上的第三方应用调用电子设备的增强功能的方法。这里,直播场景是指电子设备利用互联网和先进的多媒体通信技术,在网上构建的集音频、视频、桌面共享、文档共享、互动环节为一体的多功能网络直播平台,和他人直接在线进行语音、视频、数据的全面交流与互动的场景。以下图6A-图6H所涉及的直播场景电子设备提供给观看直播的一方的场景。In the UI embodiments exemplarily shown in FIGS. 6A to 6H below, when the user manipulates a third-party application installed on the electronic device, the electronic device may provide enhanced functions for the user to use. In other words, third-party applications on the electronic device can call enhanced functions of the electronic device. The following embodiments in FIGS. 6A to 6H use a live broadcast scene as an example to illustrate a method for a third-party application on an electronic device to invoke an enhanced function of the electronic device. Here, the live broadcast scene refers to a multi-functional web live broadcast platform built on the Internet by electronic devices using the Internet and advanced multimedia communication technology, which integrates audio, video, desktop sharing, document sharing, and interaction. A scene of comprehensive communication and interaction of video and data. The following scenes in which the electronic device for the live broadcast scene involved in FIGS. 6A to 6H is provided to the party watching the live broadcast.
图6A-图6H实施例和图4A-图4H实施例的不同之处在于,电子设备提供增强功能的使用场景不同,下面详细说明。The difference between the embodiment of Figs. 6A-6H and the embodiment of Figs. 4A-4H is that the electronic device provides different usage scenarios for enhanced functions, which will be described in detail below.
下面说明图6A-图6H示例性示出的电子设备上安装的第三方应用提供的“直播界面”。The following describes the "live streaming interface" provided by the third-party application installed on the electronic device exemplarily shown in FIGS. 6A-6H.
在一些实施例中,“直播界面”可以用于显示电子设备从网络获取到的主播(在网络直播平台发布语音、视频、数据的用户)的图像、一个或多个直播时的相关控件。直播时的相关控件可用于接收用户操作(例如触摸操作),响应于该用户操作,电子设备可以执行以下一项或多项:打开评论框、显示信息、显示直播好友、分享该“直播界面”的链接等。In some embodiments, the "live broadcast interface" may be used to display the image of the host (the user who publishes voice, video, and data on the webcast platform) obtained by the electronic device from the network, and one or more related controls during the live broadcast. Relevant controls during the live broadcast can be used to receive user operations (such as touch operations). In response to the user operations, the electronic device can perform one or more of the following: open comment boxes, display information, display live broadcast friends, and share the "live broadcast interface" Links etc.
图6A-图6H示例性示出的用户界面61可以为“直播界面”的一种实现方式。该用户界面61可以是直播类第三方应用(例如斗鱼直播、虎牙直播、熊猫直播等)提供的。在一些实施例中,该用户界面61可以是电子设备响应于在图2A中的直播类第三方应用的图标(图中未示出)上的用户操作(例如点击操作)而打开的用户界面,还可以是用户通过语音唤起的用户界面。The user interface 61 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 6A-6H may be an implementation of the "live broadcast interface". The user interface 61 may be provided by a live broadcast type third-party application (for example, Douyu Live, Huya Live, Panda Live, etc.). In some embodiments, the user interface 61 may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a user operation (for example, a click operation) on the icon (not shown in the figure) of the live broadcast third-party application in FIG. 2A, It can also be a user interface that the user awakens by voice.
如图6A-图6H所示,用户界面61可包括:状态栏601、当前页面指示符602、直播图像显示区域603、评论显示区域604、控件605A-控件605D。在一些实施例中,该用户界面61还可包括可隐藏的导航栏(图中未示出),该导航栏可参照图2A中的导航栏205。As shown in FIGS. 6A-6H, the user interface 61 may include: a status bar 601, a current page indicator 602, a live image display area 603, a comment display area 604, and controls 605A-605D. In some embodiments, the user interface 61 may further include a concealable navigation bar (not shown in the figure), and the navigation bar may refer to the navigation bar 205 in FIG. 2A.
状态栏601可参照图2A所示的用户界面21中的状态栏201,这里不再赘述。The status bar 601 can refer to the status bar 201 in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
当前页面指示符602可用于指示当前页面,例如图6A中所示的文本“1号直播间”。The current page indicator 602 may be used to indicate the current page, such as the text "Live Room 1" shown in FIG. 6A.
直播图像显示区域603用于显示电子设备通过网络接收到的直播图像。The live image display area 603 is used to display the live image received by the electronic device through the network.
评论显示区域604用于显示一个或多个本端用户或者其他用户发布的评论。The comment display area 604 is used to display comments posted by one or more local users or other users.
控件605A可用于监听用户操作(例如触摸操作),响应于该用户操作,电子设备可以在用户界面61上显示评论框以供用户输入评论。控件605B可用于监听用户操作(例如触摸操作),响应于该用户操作,电子设备可以在用户界面61上显示本端用户接收到的信息(例如私信)。控件605C可用于监听用户操作(例如触摸操作),响应于该用户操作,电子设备可以在用户界面61上显示本端用户的直播好友。控件605D可用于监听用户操作(例如触摸操作),响应于该用户操作,电子设备可以将该“直播界面”的链接分享至其他设备。The control 605A can be used to monitor user operations (such as touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can display a comment box on the user interface 61 for the user to input comments. The control 605B can be used to monitor user operations (such as touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can display information (such as private messages) received by the local user on the user interface 61. The control 605C can be used to monitor user operations (for example, touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can display the live friends of the local user on the user interface 61. The control 605D can be used to monitor user operations (such as touch operations), and in response to the user operations, the electronic device can share the link of the "live broadcast interface" to other devices.
在“功能助手”未开启的情况下,用户可以开启“功能助手”。用户可以在如图2B所示 的窗口217中开启“功能助手”,也可以在图3B或图3C所示的设置界面中开启“功能助手”。可参照前文实施例的相关描述。不限于此,在一些实施例中,电子设备还可以默认开启“功能助手”。When the "Function Assistant" is not turned on, the user can turn on the "Function Assistant". The user can start the "function assistant" in the window 217 as shown in FIG. 2B, or start the "function assistant" in the setting interface shown in FIG. 3B or FIG. 3C. Reference may be made to the relevant description of the previous embodiment. Not limited to this, in some embodiments, the electronic device may also enable the "function assistant" by default.
在一些实施例中,在“功能助手”未开启的情况下,即在电子设备当前启动的第三方应用不具有使用该电子设备的增强功能的权限时,电子设备显示如图6A所示的用户界面61时,还可以提示用户开启“功能助手”。电子设备提示用户开启“功能助手”的方式可包括但不限于:在用户界面61上显示提示信息(图中未示出)(例如文本信息、图标等)、发出提示音、振动等。In some embodiments, when the "function assistant" is not enabled, that is, when the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device does not have the permission to use the enhanced function of the electronic device, the electronic device displays the user as shown in FIG. 6A In interface 61, the user may also be prompted to open the "function assistant". The way the electronic device prompts the user to open the "function assistant" may include, but is not limited to: displaying prompt information (not shown in the figure) (for example, text information, icons, etc.) on the user interface 61, emitting prompt sounds, vibrations, and so on.
在“功能助手”已开启的情况下,即在电子设备当前启动的第三方应用具有使用该电子设备的增强功能的权限时,电子设备可以显示如图6B所示的用户界面61。如图6B所示的用户界面61可包括用于介绍“功能助手”的小窗口606。电子设备可以在开启“功能助手”后,仅在首次打开第三方应用提供的用户界面时显示该小窗口606,也可以在每次打开第三方应用提供的用户界面时显示该小窗口606,本申请对此不做限制。小窗口606可参考图4B所示用户界面41中的小窗口408,在此不再赘述。When the "function assistant" is turned on, that is, when the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device has the authority to use the enhanced function of the electronic device, the electronic device may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6B. The user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6B may include a small window 606 for introducing the "function assistant". The electronic device can display the small window 606 only when the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened for the first time after the "function assistant" is turned on, or it can display the small window 606 each time the user interface provided by the third-party application is opened. There is no restriction on this application. The small window 606 can refer to the small window 408 in the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4B, which will not be repeated here.
图6C-图6H示例性示出的用户界面61可以为电子设备呈现提供的增强功能的一种实现方式。The user interface 61 exemplarily shown in FIGS. 6C-6H may present an implementation manner of enhanced functions provided for the electronic device.
响应于检测到的作用于小窗口606中的控件606A上的操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可以显示如图6C所示的用户界面61。如图6C所示,该用户界面61中可包括控件607。控件607可参照图4C中的控件409,在此不再赘述。在一些实施例中,图4C所示的用户界面还可以包括提示信息608。提示信息608可参考图4C中的提示信息410,在此不再赘述。In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 606A in the small window 606, the electronic device may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6C. As shown in FIG. 6C, the user interface 61 may include a control 607. The control 607 can refer to the control 409 in FIG. 4C, which will not be repeated here. In some embodiments, the user interface shown in FIG. 4C may further include prompt information 608. For the prompt information 608, refer to the prompt information 410 in FIG. 4C, which will not be repeated here.
这里,电子设备当前提供的增强功能的确定方式可以有以下几种:1.电子设备当前提供的增强功能可以是该电子设备所具备的全部增强功能。2.电子设备当前提供的增强功能可以是当前启动的第三方应用(例如斗鱼直播)可用的增强功能。3.电子设备当前提供的增强功能可以是当前的使用场景(例如直播场景)可用的增强功能。后续实施例将详细描述电子设备运行第三方应用时提供的增强功能的确定方式,在此暂不赘述。Here, the methods for determining the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be as follows: 1. The enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device may be all enhanced functions of the electronic device. 2. The enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be the enhanced function available for the currently launched third-party application (such as Douyu Live). 3. The enhanced function currently provided by the electronic device may be an enhanced function available in the current use scene (for example, a live broadcast scene). Subsequent embodiments will describe in detail the method for determining the enhanced function provided when the electronic device runs a third-party application, and will not be repeated here.
图6D所示的用户界面61示出了电子设备展开显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件的一种实现方式。在图6D实施例中,电子设备当前提供的增强功能包括:“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能和“美音”功能。该用户界面61,可以是电子设备响应于检测到的作用于图6C所示的控件607上的操作(例如点击操作)而打开的用户界面。该用户界面41,也可以是可以是电子设备响应于在图2A中的直播类第三方应用的图标(图中未示出)上的用户操作(例如点击操作)而打开的用户界面,还可以是电子设备响应于用户的语音而打开的用户界面。The user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6D shows an implementation manner in which the electronic device expands and displays the control corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function. In the embodiment in FIG. 6D, the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device include: "network acceleration" function, "coding optimization" function, and "beautiful sound" function. The user interface 61 may be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a detected operation (for example, a click operation) acting on the control 607 shown in FIG. 6C. The user interface 41 may also be a user interface opened by the electronic device in response to a user operation (for example, a click operation) on the icon (not shown in the figure) of the live broadcast third-party application in FIG. 2A, or It is the user interface opened by the electronic device in response to the user's voice.
如图6D所示,该用户界面61可包括:控件609A、控件609B和控件609C。As shown in FIG. 6D, the user interface 61 may include: a control 609A, a control 609B, and a control 609C.
控件609A用于监听开启“网络加速”功能的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件609A上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可以开启“网络加速”功能。“网络加速”功能可用于加快当前的直播界面中直播图像的获取速度。“网络加速”功能可以使得用户在观看直播图像时更加流畅,避免卡顿。The control 609A is used to monitor the operation of enabling the "network acceleration" function. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 609A, the electronic device can turn on the "network acceleration" function. The "Network Acceleration" function can be used to speed up the acquisition of live images in the current live broadcast interface. The "Network Acceleration" function can make users watch live images more smoothly and avoid stalls.
控件609B用于监听开启“编码优化”功能的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件609B上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可以开启“编码优化”功能。“编码优化”功能可用于提升 当前的直播界面中直播图像的视觉质量效果。The control 609B is used to monitor the operation of enabling the "coding optimization" function. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 609B, the electronic device can turn on the "coding optimization" function. The "Encoding Optimization" function can be used to improve the visual quality of live images in the current live broadcast interface.
控件609C用于监听开启“美音”功能的操作。响应于检测到的作用于控件609C上的操作(如触摸操作),电子设备可以开启“美音”功能。“美音”功能可用于对直播界面中直播图像对应的音频进行美化处理,该美化处理可包括例如对音频的音调、音色做处理等。The control 609C is used to monitor the operation of turning on the "American Voice" function. In response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the control 609C, the electronic device can turn on the "beautiful sound" function. The "beautiful sound" function can be used to beautify the audio corresponding to the live image in the live interface. The beautification can include, for example, processing the tone and tone of the audio.
控件609A、控件609B和控件609C的表现形式可以包括图标和/或文本。The manifestations of the control 609A, the control 609B, and the control 609C may include icons and/or text.
在一些实施例中,当控件609A、控件609B或控件609C被用户选定时,即用户选择启用电子设备对应的增强功能时,该控件的显示状态可用于表示该控件被选定。该显示状态可包括:添加背景色、下划线或者高亮显示等。In some embodiments, when the control 609A, control 609B, or control 609C is selected by the user, that is, when the user chooses to enable the enhanced function corresponding to the electronic device, the display state of the control can be used to indicate that the control is selected. The display state may include: adding a background color, underlining, or highlighting, etc.
图6E示例性示出的用户界面61可以为第三方应用调用电子设备提供的“编码优化”功能的一种实现方式。如图4E所示,控件609B内选定,即用户选择启用电子设备提供的“编码优化”功能,该控件609B的背景颜色可以为灰色。如图6E所示,直播图像显示区域603中显示的直播图像的视觉质量有所提升。The user interface 61 exemplarily shown in FIG. 6E may be an implementation manner for a third-party application to call the "coding optimization" function provided by the electronic device. As shown in FIG. 4E, the control 609B is selected, that is, the user chooses to enable the "coding optimization" function provided by the electronic device, and the background color of the control 609B can be gray. As shown in FIG. 6E, the visual quality of the live image displayed in the live image display area 603 is improved.
图6F所示的用户界面61可以是电子设备停止显示或者收起显示当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件或其他交互元素的一种实现方式。在一些实施例中,在预设时间内,如果电子设备没有在如图6E所示的用户界面61的控件609A-控件609C上接收到用户操作,则可以显示如图6F所示的用户界面61。在另一些实施例中,电子设备可以响应于检测到的在如图6E所示的用户界面61上空白区域的操作(如触摸操作),显示如图6F所示的用户界面61。这里,用户界面61上的空白区域可以是指除控件以及其他交互元素之外的其他区域,例如可以是本端直播图像显示区域603。The user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6F may be an implementation manner in which the electronic device stops displaying or retracts to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the currently provided enhanced function. In some embodiments, within a preset time, if the electronic device does not receive a user operation on the control 609A-control 609C of the user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6E, it may display the user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6F. . In other embodiments, the electronic device may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6F in response to a detected operation (such as a touch operation) on a blank area on the user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 6E. Here, the blank area on the user interface 61 may refer to other areas except controls and other interactive elements, for example, may be the local live image display area 603.
如图6F所示,该用户界面61可以停止显示或者收起显示电子设备当前提供的增强功能所对应的控件或其他交互元素,即停止显示控件609A-控件609C。As shown in FIG. 6F, the user interface 61 can stop displaying or retract to display the controls or other interactive elements corresponding to the enhanced functions currently provided by the electronic device, that is, stop displaying the controls 609A-609C.
在一些实施例中,电子设备还可以停止显示控件607。图6F-图6H示出了一种电子设备停止显示控件607的一种实现方式。该停止显示控件607的方式和图4F-图6H示出的电子设备停止显示控件409的方式相同,可参考相关描述,在此不再赘述。In some embodiments, the electronic device may also stop displaying the control 607. 6F-6H show an implementation manner of an electronic device to stop displaying the control 607. The manner of stopping the display of the control 607 is the same as the manner of stopping the display of the control 409 of the electronic device shown in FIG. 4F to FIG.
可理解的,不限于上述实施例提及的视频通话场景或直播场景,在本申请实施例中,电子设备也可以在其他使用场景下提供增强功能。电子设备在其他使用场景下提供增强功能的方式和上述图4A-图4H实施例、图5A-图5F实施例、图6A-图6H实施例类似,可参考相关描述,这里不再一一例举。It is understandable that it is not limited to the video call scenes or live broadcast scenes mentioned in the foregoing embodiments. In the embodiments of the present application, the electronic device may also provide enhanced functions in other usage scenarios. The way the electronic device provides enhanced functions in other usage scenarios is similar to the above-mentioned embodiments of Figure 4A-Figure 4H, Figure 5A-Figure 5F, and Figure 6A-Figure 6H. Reference may be made to the relevant descriptions, and no one will be described here. Lift.
下面详细描述本申请实施例中,电子设备在启动第三方应用时,提供给用户的增强功能的确定方式。这里,电子设备启动第三方应用时提供给用户的增强功能可以是指,电子设备在启动第三方应用之后,可以提供给用户选择从而启用的增强功能,例如图4A-图4H实施例、图5A-图5F实施例中电子设备提供的“美颜”功能、“美体”功能和“虚化”功能,又例如图6A-图6H实施例中电子设备提供的“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能和“美音功能”。The following describes in detail the method for determining the enhanced function provided to the user when the electronic device starts a third-party application in the embodiment of the present application. Here, the enhanced function provided to the user when the electronic device starts the third-party application may refer to the enhanced function that the electronic device can provide to the user to select and enable after the third-party application is started. For example, the embodiment of FIG. 4A-4H, FIG. 5A -The "beauty" function, the "beauty" function, and the "blur" function provided by the electronic device in the embodiment of FIG. 5F, for example the "network acceleration" function and the "coding optimization" provided by the electronic device in the embodiment of FIG. 6A-6H ”Function and “beautiful tone function”.
(一)第一种确定方式,电子设备提供给用户的增强功能包括:该电子设备具备的全部增强功能。(1) In the first determination method, the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: all enhanced functions of the electronic device.
增强功能可以是生产厂商基于电子设备独特的硬件和/或软件来开发的。例如,华为(HUAWEI)手机配置有徕卡摄像头,基于该摄像头手机在拍照时可以提供“大光圈拍摄” 功能、“超广角拍摄”功能等。又例如,手机生产厂商自主研发算法从而提供的拍照时的“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能等;录制小视频时的“防抖”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能;播放视频时的“超分辨率(superresolution)成像”功能、“色彩增强”功能等;录制音乐时的“美音”功能等。可以看出,电子设备的增强功能可包括一个或多个。The enhanced function may be developed by the manufacturer based on the unique hardware and/or software of the electronic device. For example, Huawei (HUAWEI) mobile phone is equipped with a Leica camera, based on the camera mobile phone can provide "large aperture shooting" function, "ultra wide-angle shooting" function, etc. when taking pictures. Another example is the "beauty" function, "beauty" function, and "blur" function provided by mobile phone manufacturers independently developed algorithms for taking pictures; the "anti-shake" function and "ultra wide-angle shooting" function when recording small videos ; "Superresolution imaging" function, "color enhancement" function, etc. when playing video; "Beautiful sound" function when recording music, etc. It can be seen that the enhanced function of the electronic device may include one or more.
通过第一种确定方式,电子设备在启动每一个第三方应用时,都可以为用户提供该电子设备具备的全部增强功能。可以使得电子设备上安装的第三方应用可以调用电子设备的增强功能,用户可以充分利用电子设备提供的增强功能,提升用户使用第三方应用时的体验。Through the first determination method, the electronic device can provide the user with all the enhanced functions of the electronic device when starting each third-party application. The third-party application installed on the electronic device can call the enhanced function of the electronic device, and the user can make full use of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to improve the user's experience when using the third-party application.
(二)第二种确定方式,电子设备提供给用户的增强功能包括:该电子设备具备的全部增强功能中,该电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能。(2) In the second determining method, the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: among all the enhanced functions of the electronic device, the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently activated by the electronic device.
在第二种确定方式中,电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能可包括:该电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所提供的一个或多个使用场景所对应的增强功能。In the second determining manner, the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may include: enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device.
具体的,通常情况下,第三方应用提供的使用场景并非单一的,一个第三方应用可以提供多个使用场景。不同的第三方应用可以提供不同的使用场景。示例性地,参见表1,表1示例性列出了几种第三方应用提供的使用场景。如表1所示,即时通讯类第三方应用例如微信(WeChat)、Skype、WhatsApp等提供的使用场景可包括:社交通讯场景(例如文字或语音聊天)、小视频录制场景、视频播放场景、阅读新闻资讯的场景、视频播放场景、音频播放场景等;购物类第三方应用例如淘宝、亚马逊(Amazon)等应用可以提供的使用场景可包括购物场景、直播场景等。Specifically, generally, the use scenarios provided by third-party applications are not single, and a third-party application can provide multiple use scenarios. Different third-party applications can provide different usage scenarios. Exemplarily, refer to Table 1, which exemplarily lists usage scenarios provided by several third-party applications. As shown in Table 1, the usage scenarios provided by instant messaging third-party applications such as WeChat, Skype, WhatsApp, etc. may include: social communication scenarios (such as text or voice chat), small video recording scenarios, video playback scenarios, and reading News scenes, video playback scenes, audio playback scenes, etc.; third-party shopping applications such as Taobao, Amazon and other applications can provide usage scenarios including shopping scenes, live broadcast scenes, etc.
Figure PCTCN2020084594-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020084594-appb-000001
表1不同的第三方应用提供的使用场景Table 1 Usage scenarios provided by different third-party applications
可理解的,在本申请实施例中,使用场景可以按照用户需求进行分类,也可以按照其他标准例如电子设备提供该使用场景时所调用的资源等进行分类,本申请对此不做限制。It is understandable that, in the embodiments of the present application, the usage scenarios can be classified according to user requirements, or can be classified according to other criteria, such as resources called when the electronic device provides the usage scenario, and this application does not limit this.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备的各个增强功能分别有对应的使用场景。一般情况下,只有在对应的使用场景下才会使用到该增强功能,在其他使用场景下不会使用到该增强功能。也就是说,不同的使用场景可以对应有不同的增强功能。In the embodiment of the present application, each enhanced function of the electronic device has a corresponding usage scenario. In general, this enhanced function will only be used in the corresponding use scenario, and will not be used in other use scenarios. In other words, different usage scenarios can correspond to different enhanced functions.
在本申请实施例中,不同的使用场景分别对应的增强功能可以预先配置在电子设备中。示例性地,参见表1,表1示例性列出了几种使用场景分别对应的增强功能。如表1所示,“大光圈”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能、“美颜”功能、“美体”功能等适用于拍照场景;“超分辨率成像”功能、“色彩增强”功能等适用于播放视频场景;“美音”功能适用于录制音频的场景等。In the embodiment of the present application, enhanced functions corresponding to different usage scenarios may be pre-configured in the electronic device. Exemplarily, refer to Table 1, which exemplarily lists the enhanced functions corresponding to several usage scenarios. As shown in Table 1, the “large aperture” function, “ultra-wide-angle shooting” function, “beauty” function, “beauty” function, etc. are suitable for shooting scenes; “super-resolution imaging” function, “color enhancement” function, etc. are applicable It is suitable for playing video scenes; the "American Sound" function is suitable for recording audio scenes.
Figure PCTCN2020084594-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020084594-appb-000002
表2不同的使用场景分别对应的增强功能Table 2 Enhanced functions corresponding to different usage scenarios
在第(二)种确定方式中,电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能可包括:该电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所提供的一个或多个使用场景所对应的增强功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备可以在安装第三方应用时,即匹配或确定该第三方应用所提供的一个或多个使用场景所对应的增强功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备可以在启动该第三方应用时,再匹配或确定该第三方应用所提供的一个或多个使用场景所对应的增强功能。In the second determination method, the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may include: enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device . In some embodiments, the electronic device may match or determine the enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application when the third-party application is installed. In other embodiments, the electronic device may match or determine the enhanced functions corresponding to one or more usage scenarios provided by the third-party application when the third-party application is started.
举例来说,参照表2,微信(WeChat)所提供的使用场景包括:社交通讯场景、小视频录制场景、视频播放场景和阅读新闻资讯的场景,微信(WeChat)所能够使用的增强功能可包括这些使用场景所对应的增强功能,可包括:“红包加速”功能、“趣味聊天”功能、“大光圈”功能、“超广角拍摄”功能、“美颜”功能、“瘦身”功能、“超分辨率成像”功能、“色彩增强”功能、“稍后阅读”功能、“智能识屏”功能等。For example, referring to Table 2, the usage scenarios provided by WeChat include: social communication scenarios, small video recording scenarios, video playback scenarios, and news reading scenarios. The enhanced functions that WeChat can use may include The enhanced functions corresponding to these usage scenarios may include: "red envelope acceleration" function, "fun chat" function, "large aperture" function, "ultra wide-angle shooting" function, "beauty" function, "slimming" function, "super Resolution imaging" function, "color enhancement" function, "read later" function, "intelligent screen recognition" function, etc.
再举例来说,淘宝所提供的使用场景包括购物场景和游戏场景,淘宝所能够使用的增强功能可包括:“商品历史价格展示”功能、“商品快速对比”功能、“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能、“美音”功能等。For another example, the usage scenarios provided by Taobao include shopping scenarios and game scenarios. The enhanced functions that Taobao can use may include: "product historical price display" function, "product quick comparison" function, "network acceleration" function, " Coding optimization" function, "Beautiful Voice" function, etc.
在第二种确定方式中,电子设备可以首先确定当前启动的第三方应用,再确定该第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能,并将该第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能提供给用户使用。电子设备当前启动的第三方应用可以是指电子设备的前台应用,该前台应用可占用屏幕焦点为用户提供图形用户界面。In the second determining method, the electronic device may first determine the currently launched third-party application, then determine the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application, and provide the user with the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application. The third-party application currently launched by the electronic device may refer to the foreground application of the electronic device, and the foreground application may occupy the screen focus to provide a user with a graphical user interface.
电子设备可以通过如下任意一种方式来确定当前启动的第三方应用:1.查看RunningTask的栈顶的任务进程的名称,该名称可用于指示当前启动的第三方应用。2.通过runningProcess获取到一个当前正在运行的进程列表(list),遍历这个列表中的每一个进程,判断这个进程是否是前台进程,若是,则该进程的名称可用于指示当前启动的第三方应用。3.通过UsageStatsManager获取所有应用的使用情况,从而确定当前启动的第三方应用。The electronic device can determine the currently launched third-party application in any of the following ways: 1. View the name of the task process at the top of the RunningTask stack, which can be used to indicate the currently launched third-party application. 2. Obtain a list of currently running processes through runningProcess, traverse each process in this list, and determine whether the process is a foreground process. If so, the name of the process can be used to indicate the currently launched third-party application . 3. Obtain the usage status of all applications through the UsageStatsManager to determine the currently launched third-party application.
通过第二种确定方式,电子设备在启动不同的第三方应用时,可以为用户提供不同的增 强功能。也就是说,电子设备可以为用户提供适用于当前启动的第三方应用的增强功能给用户。用户在使用电子设备上不同的第三方应用时,可以使用到不同的增强功能。Through the second determination method, the electronic device can provide users with different enhanced functions when launching different third-party applications. In other words, the electronic device can provide the user with enhanced functions suitable for the currently launched third-party application. When users use different third-party applications on electronic devices, they can use different enhanced functions.
(三)第三种确定方式,电子设备提供给用户的增强功能包括:适用于当前使用场景的增强功能。(3) In the third determination method, the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: enhanced functions suitable for the current use scenario.
在一些实施例中,适用于当前使用场景的增强功能可以是和当前使用场景对应的增强功能,可参照表2以及相关描述。举例来说,若当前使用场景为视频通话场景,则电子设备提供给用户的增强功能包括:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能;若当前使用场景为视频播放场景,则电子设备提供给用户的增强功能包括:“超分辨率成像”功能、“色彩增强”功能。电子设备可以在内核层、系统层或应用程序框架层中一个或多个中,读取当前启动的第三方应用占用的资源类别和/或该第三方应用当前提供用户界面,确定当前的使用场景。In some embodiments, the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may be an enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario, and reference may be made to Table 2 and related descriptions. For example, if the current use scene is a video call scene, the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: "beauty" function, "beauty" function, and "blur" function; if the current use scene is a video playback scene, The enhancement functions provided by the electronic device to the user include: "super-resolution imaging" function and "color enhancement" function. The electronic device can read the resource category occupied by the currently launched third-party application and/or the user interface currently provided by the third-party application in one or more of the kernel layer, the system layer, or the application framework layer, and determine the current usage scenario .
举例来说,若该第三方应用占用的硬件资源包括摄像头和麦克风,则可以确定当前的使用场景为视频录制场景;若第三方应用调用了处理器(CPU)进行视频解码,并且占用了音频播放设备(例如扬声器170A等),则可确定当前的使用场景为视频播放场景;若第三方应用使用图形处理器(GPU)在进行图形渲染,结合识别到当前界面名称(例如电子设备当前运行的第三方应用为“王者荣耀”,则电子设备可以从后台抓取到界面名称“com.tencent.tmgp.sgame.SGameActivity”),则可以确定当前的使用场景为游戏场景;若第三方应用调用了处理器(CPU)进行视频编解码、还调用了摄像头、麦克风,并且无线通信模块或移动通信模块有数据传输(即和网络服务器之间有数据交换),结合识别到的当前界面名称(例如电子设备当前运行的第三方应用“微信(WeChat)”提供视频通话场景,则电子设备可以从后台抓取到界面名称“com.tencent.mm.plugin.voip.ui.VideoActivity”),则可确定当前的使用场景为视频通话场景。这里,当前界面是指当前启动的第三方应用提供的、占用屏幕焦点的图形用户界面。电子设备识别当前界面的方式,和确定当前启动的第三方应用的方式类似,可参照相关描述。For example, if the hardware resources occupied by the third-party application include a camera and a microphone, it can be determined that the current use scene is a video recording scene; if the third-party application calls the processor (CPU) for video decoding and occupies audio playback Device (such as speaker 170A, etc.), it can be determined that the current use scene is a video playback scene; if a third-party application uses a graphics processing unit (GPU) to perform graphics rendering, combined with the identification of the current interface name (such as the current operation of the electronic device) If the third-party application is "Glory of the King", the electronic device can grab the interface name "com.tencent.tmgp.sgame.SGameActivity" from the background), and then it can be determined that the current use scene is the game scene; if the third-party application calls the process The CPU performs video encoding and decoding, and also calls the camera and microphone, and the wireless communication module or mobile communication module has data transmission (that is, there is data exchange with the network server), combined with the recognized current interface name (such as electronic equipment) The currently running third-party application "WeChat (WeChat)" provides a video call scene, the electronic device can grab the interface name "com.tencent.mm.plugin.voip.ui.VideoActivity") from the background, and then the current The use scene is a video call scene. Here, the current interface refers to a graphical user interface provided by a currently launched third-party application that occupies the screen focus. The way the electronic device recognizes the current interface is similar to the way to determine the currently launched third-party application, and you can refer to related descriptions.
在另一些实施例中,适用于当前使用场景的增强功能可以指:当前使用场景对应的增强功能中,和电子设备当前提供的能力兼容的增强功能。在当前使用场景对应的增强功能中,除去和电子设备当前提供的能力互斥的增强功能,即为适用于当前使用场景的增强功能。In other embodiments, the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario may refer to the enhanced function corresponding to the current usage scenario that is compatible with the capabilities currently provided by the electronic device. Among the enhancement functions corresponding to the current usage scenario, the enhancement functions that are mutually exclusive with the capabilities currently provided by the electronic device are removed, which is the enhancement function suitable for the current usage scenario.
可理解的,由于资源冲突或其他原因,电子设备所具有的功能(包括增强功能和非增强功能)当中,有部分是互相排斥的,电子设备不能同时提供互斥的功能。举例来说,电子设备不能同时提供增强功能“美肤”功能和非增强功能“防抖”功能,也不能同时提供增强功能“虚化”功能和非增强功能“高动态范围成像(high dynamic range imaging,HDR)”功能,也不能同时提供增强功能“超广角拍摄”功能和非增强功能“防抖”功能。It is understandable that due to resource conflicts or other reasons, some of the functions (including enhanced functions and non-enhanced functions) possessed by electronic devices are mutually exclusive, and electronic devices cannot provide mutually exclusive functions at the same time. For example, electronic devices cannot provide both the enhanced function "skin beautification" function and the non-enhanced function "anti-shake" function, nor the enhanced function "blur" function and the non-enhanced function "high dynamic range imaging" at the same time. Imaging, HDR)” function, and cannot provide both the enhanced function “ultra wide-angle shooting” function and the non-enhanced function “anti-shake” function.
电子设备可以读取当前占用的资源参数,确定当前已经提供给用户的功能。电子设备当前占用的资源参数可包括但不限于:相机参数、编解码参数、显示参数、网络参数、音频参数等。其中,相机参数可包括分辨率、帧率、对焦模式、防抖模式,编解码参数可包括:码率、I帧间隔,显示参数可包括分辨率、显示模式(例如SurfaceView、TextureView)等。举例来说,电子设备可通过读取到的相机参数(例如分辨率、对焦参数)确定已经提供“美肤”功能或“防抖”功能等。The electronic device can read the resource parameters currently occupied and determine the functions currently provided to the user. The resource parameters currently occupied by the electronic device may include, but are not limited to: camera parameters, codec parameters, display parameters, network parameters, audio parameters, and so on. Among them, camera parameters may include resolution, frame rate, focus mode, and anti-shake mode, coding and decoding parameters may include: bit rate, I frame interval, and display parameters may include resolution, display mode (such as SurfaceView, TextureView), and so on. For example, the electronic device can determine that it has provided a "skin beautification" function or an "anti-shake" function through the read camera parameters (such as resolution and focus parameters).
通过第三种确定方式,电子设备在启动第三方应用时,在该第三方应用提供的不同使用场景下可以为用户提供不同的增强功能。也就是说,电子设备可以为用户提供适用于当前使 用场景的增强功能给用户。用户在打开电子设备上同一第三方应用的不同界面时,可以使用到不同的增强功能。Through the third determination method, when the electronic device starts the third-party application, it can provide users with different enhanced functions in different usage scenarios provided by the third-party application. In other words, the electronic device can provide users with enhanced functions suitable for current usage scenarios. Users can use different enhanced functions when opening different interfaces of the same third-party application on the electronic device.
在本申请中,用于监听开启增强功能的操作的控件可以被称为增强功能选项,用于展示该增强功能选项的用户界面可以被称为第一用户界面。第一用户界面的示例性实现方式可以包括图4D所示的用户界面41、图5D所示的用户界面51或图6D所示的用户界面61。增强功能选项的示例性实现方式可包括图4D所示的控件411A、控件411B、控件411C,或者,图5D所示的控件502A、控件502B、控件502C,或者,图6D所示的控件609A、控件609B、控件609C。In this application, the control used to monitor the operation of enabling the enhanced function may be referred to as an enhanced function option, and the user interface used to display the enhanced function option may be referred to as the first user interface. An exemplary implementation of the first user interface may include the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4D, the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5D, or the user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6D. Exemplary implementations of the enhanced function option may include the control 411A, the control 411B, and the control 411C shown in FIG. 4D, or the control 502A, the control 502B, and the control 502C shown in FIG. 5D, or the control 609A, Control 609B, control 609C.
在本申请一些实施例中,用于开启第三方应用的操作,或者,用于在第三方应用提供的多个用户界面之间进行切换的操作,可以被称为对第三方应用的第一操作。对第三方应用的第一操作的示例性实现方式可以包括用户在微信(WeChat)提供的用户界面中选择联系人发起视频通话的操作,或者,用户在主界面(Home screen)上点击直播类第三方应用的图标的操作。In some embodiments of the present application, the operation for opening a third-party application, or the operation for switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application, may be referred to as the first operation on the third-party application . An exemplary implementation of the first operation of the third-party application may include the user selecting a contact in the user interface provided by WeChat to initiate a video call, or the user clicking on the live broadcast category on the home screen The operation of the icon of the third party application.
在本申请一些实施例中,用于监听展开增强功能选项的操作的控件可以被称为增强功能控件,用于展示该增强功能控件的用户界面可以被称为第二用户界面。第二用户界面的示例性实现方式可以包括图4C所示的用户界面41或图6C所示的用户界面61。增强功能控件的示例性实现方式可以包括图4C中的控件409或者图6C中的控件507。In some embodiments of the present application, the control used to monitor the operation of expanding the enhanced function option may be called an enhanced function control, and the user interface used to display the enhanced function control may be called a second user interface. An exemplary implementation of the second user interface may include the user interface 41 shown in FIG. 4C or the user interface 61 shown in FIG. 6C. An exemplary implementation of the enhanced function control may include the control 409 in FIG. 4C or the control 507 in FIG. 6C.
在本申请一些实施例中,用于监听隐藏增强功能控件的操作的交互元素的示例性实现方式可包括图4G所示的控件414或图6G所示的控件611。用户唤出该交互元素的操作可包括在增强功能控件上的手势,该手势可包括长按手势、滑动手势、双击手势或重压手势等。In some embodiments of the present application, exemplary implementations of interactive elements for monitoring the operation of hiding the enhanced function control may include the control 414 shown in FIG. 4G or the control 611 shown in FIG. 6G. The user's operation to call out the interactive element may include a gesture on the enhanced function control. The gesture may include a long-press gesture, a sliding gesture, a double-click gesture, or a heavy-press gesture.
在本申请一些实施例中,图5C所示的用户界面51可以被称为第三用户界面。响应于在第三用户界面的第一方向上的滑动手势,电子设备显示第一用户界面。该第一方向可以是从显示屏右侧往左侧的方向、从显示屏上方往下方的方向、从显示屏左侧往右侧的方向等,本申请对此不做限制。In some embodiments of the present application, the user interface 51 shown in FIG. 5C may be referred to as a third user interface. In response to the sliding gesture in the first direction of the third user interface, the electronic device displays the first user interface. The first direction may be a direction from the right side to the left side of the display screen, a direction from the top of the display screen to the bottom, a direction from the left side to the right side of the display screen, etc., which is not limited in this application.
在本申请一些实施例中,用于调节电子设备提供的增强功能的级别的控件可以被称为增强功能菜单。增强功能菜单的示例性实现方式可包括如图4E所示的控件412B。In some embodiments of the present application, the control used to adjust the level of enhanced functions provided by the electronic device may be referred to as an enhanced function menu. An exemplary implementation of the enhanced function menu may include a control 412B as shown in FIG. 4E.
在本申请一些实施例中,用于显示提示信息和第一交互元素的用户界面可以被称为第四用户界面。该提示信息的示例性实现方式可包括图4B所示的小窗口408中的提示信息408C,合作恶化,图5B所示的小窗口中的提示信息,或者,图6B所示的小窗口606中的提示信息。第一交互元素的示例性实现方式可包括图4B所示的小窗口408中的提示信息408E,或者,图6B所示的小窗口606中的控件606A。In some embodiments of the present application, the user interface for displaying the prompt information and the first interaction element may be referred to as the fourth user interface. An exemplary implementation of the prompt information may include the prompt information 408C in the small window 408 shown in FIG. 4B, the cooperation is deteriorated, the prompt information in the small window shown in FIG. 5B, or the small window 606 shown in FIG. 6B Prompt information. An exemplary implementation of the first interactive element may include the prompt information 408E in the small window 408 shown in FIG. 4B, or the control 606A in the small window 606 shown in FIG. 6B.
在本申请一些实施例中,图2B所示的用户界面21、图3B所示的用户界面32或图3C所示的用户界面33可以被称为第五用户界面。第五用户界面中用于开启“功能助手”的控件可以被称为第二交互元素,第二交互元素的示例性实现方式可包括图2B所示用户界面21中的控件217A、图3B所示用户界面32中的控件308或图3C所示用户界面33中的控件313-控件316。In some embodiments of the present application, the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2B, the user interface 32 shown in FIG. 3B, or the user interface 33 shown in FIG. 3C may be referred to as a fifth user interface. The control used to start the "function assistant" in the fifth user interface may be referred to as the second interactive element. Exemplary implementations of the second interactive element may include controls 217A in the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 2B and shown in FIG. 3B The control 308 in the user interface 32 or the control 313-the control 316 in the user interface 33 shown in FIG. 3C.
在本申请一些实施例中,电子设备在不同的使用场景下可提供不同的增强功能。例如,电子设备可响应于对第三方应用的第二操作,显示第六用户界面,该第六用户界面包括一个 或多个增强功能选项。对第三方应用的第二操作可包括用于在第三方应用提供的多个用户界面之间进行切换的操作,该第二操作的示例性实现方式可包括用户在微信(WeChat)提供的用户界面中选择联系人并向其发送文字消息的操作。第六用户界面的示例性实现方式可包括文字聊天界面。该第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项不同于第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项。In some embodiments of the present application, the electronic device may provide different enhanced functions in different usage scenarios. For example, the electronic device may display a sixth user interface in response to the second operation of the third-party application, the sixth user interface including one or more enhanced function options. The second operation on the third-party application may include an operation for switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application, and an exemplary implementation of the second operation may include a user interface provided by the user on WeChat Select a contact and send a text message to it. An exemplary implementation of the sixth user interface may include a text chat interface. The one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。In the embodiment of the present application, the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. The embodiment of the present application takes a layered Android system as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100.
参见图7,图7示出了本申请实施例示例性提供的电子设备100的软件结构框图。该电子设备100在启用第三方应用时可以调用该电子设备的的增强功能。Referring to FIG. 7, FIG. 7 shows a software structure block diagram of an electronic device 100 exemplarily provided in an embodiment of the present application. The electronic device 100 can invoke enhanced functions of the electronic device when a third-party application is activated.
如图7所示,该电子设备可包括:应用程序层、应用程序接口(application programming interface,API)、增强功能匹配模块、增强功能穿透模块、硬件抽象层(hardware abstraction layer,HAL)层及内核层(kernel)。其中:As shown in Figure 7, the electronic device may include: application layer, application programming interface (application programming interface, API), enhanced function matching module, enhanced function penetration module, hardware abstraction layer (HAL) layer and The kernel layer (kernel). among them:
应用程序层包括一系列应用程序包,例如“功能助手”以及第三方应用程序。“功能助手”可以是电子设备提供的一种服务或功能,可参照前文实施例的相关描述。“功能助手”可支持启用第三方应用时提供电子设备的增强功能,电子设备的增强功能可参照前文实施例的相关描述,例如可包括“美颜”功能、“大光圈”功能、“广角”功能、“防抖”功能等。第三方应用程序可参照前文实施例的相关描述,例如可包括微信、Messenger、Skype、抖音等。The application layer includes a series of application packages, such as "function assistants" and third-party applications. The "function assistant" may be a service or function provided by the electronic device, and reference may be made to the related description of the foregoing embodiment. The "Function Assistant" can support the enhanced functions of electronic devices when third-party applications are activated. For the enhanced functions of electronic devices, please refer to the relevant descriptions in the previous embodiments, for example, may include the "beauty" function, the "large aperture" function, and the "wide angle" Function, "Anti-shake" function, etc. The third-party application program can refer to the related description of the previous embodiment, for example, it can include WeChat, Messenger, Skype, Douyin, etc.
在一些实施例中,“功能助手”可用于确定电子设备当前启动的第三方应用是否有权限使用该电子设备的增强功能。In some embodiments, the "function assistant" can be used to determine whether the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device has the authority to use the enhanced function of the electronic device.
应用程序接口用于实现应用程序层和HAL层及内核层(kernel)之间的通信。例如,可提供第三方应用和HAL层及内核层(kernel)之间的通信等。The application program interface is used to realize the communication between the application layer and the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel). For example, it can provide communication between third-party applications and the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel).
增强功能匹配模块用于确定电子设备在启动第三方应用时提供给用户的增强功能,即用于确定电子设备向当前运行的第三方应用提供的增强功能。The enhanced function matching module is used to determine the enhanced function that the electronic device provides to the user when the third-party application is started, that is, it is used to determine the enhanced function that the electronic device provides to the currently running third-party application.
在一些实施例中,增强功能匹配模块可以将电子设备具备的全部增强功能,确定为该电子设备在启动第三方应用时提供给用户的增强功能。这里,该增强功能匹配模块确定该提供给用户的增强功能的方式可参照前文提及的第(一)种确定方式。In some embodiments, the enhanced function matching module may determine all the enhanced functions of the electronic device as the enhanced functions provided to the user when the electronic device starts a third-party application. Here, the manner in which the enhanced function matching module determines the enhanced function provided to the user can refer to the first determining manner mentioned above.
在另一些实施例中,该电子设备还可包括应用识别模块。应用识别模块可用于识别该电子设备当前启动的第三方应用。增强功能匹配模块可以将该电子设备具备的全部增强功能中,该电子设备当前启动的第三方应用所能够使用的增强功能,确定为该电子设备在启动该第三方应用时提供给用户的增强功能。这里,该增强功能匹配模块确定该提供给用户的增强功能的方式可参照前文提及的第(二)种确定方式。In other embodiments, the electronic device may further include an application identification module. The application identification module can be used to identify the third-party application currently activated by the electronic device. The enhanced function matching module may determine that among all the enhanced functions of the electronic device, the enhanced functions that can be used by the third-party application currently launched by the electronic device are the enhanced functions that the electronic device provides to the user when the third-party application is launched . Here, the manner in which the enhanced function matching module determines the enhanced function provided to the user may refer to the (2) determination manner mentioned above.
在又一些实施例中,该电子设备还可包括场景识别及参数搜集模块。场景识别及参数搜集模块可用于识别当前电子设备提供的使用场景以及当前已经提供的功能。增强功能匹配模块用于将适用于当前使用场景的增强功能,确定为该电子设备在启动该第三方应用时提供给用户的增强功能。这里,该增强功能匹配模块确定该提供给用户的增强功能的方式可参照前文提及的第(三)种确定方式,适用于当前使用场景的增强功能可参照前文第(三)种确定方式中的相关描述。In still other embodiments, the electronic device may further include a scene recognition and parameter collection module. The scene recognition and parameter collection module can be used to identify the current use scene provided by the electronic device and the currently provided functions. The enhanced function matching module is used to determine the enhanced function applicable to the current usage scenario as the enhanced function provided to the user by the electronic device when the third-party application is started. Here, the method for the enhanced function matching module to determine the enhanced function provided to the user can refer to the above-mentioned (3) determination method, and the enhanced function suitable for the current use scenario can refer to the above (3) determination method Related description.
应用程序层中的“功能助手”在增强功能匹配模块确定了提供给用户的增强功能后,可以将该增强功能呈现给用户,以供用户选择想要启用的增强功能。“功能助手”呈现该增强功能给用户的方式可包括在屏幕上显示增强功能对应的控件等。“功能助手”将可用功能呈现给用户的方式,可参照图4A-图4H、图5A-图5F、图6A-图6H实施例的相关描述。用户可以在“功能助手”提供增强功能后,选择调用或启用其中的一个或多个增强功能。After the enhanced function matching module determines the enhanced function provided to the user, the "function assistant" in the application layer may present the enhanced function to the user for the user to select the enhanced function that he wants to enable. The way the "function assistant" presents the enhanced function to the user may include displaying controls corresponding to the enhanced function on the screen. For the manner in which the "function assistant" presents the available functions to the user, please refer to the relevant descriptions of the embodiments in FIGS. 4A-4H, 5A-5F, and 6A-6H. The user can choose to call or enable one or more of the enhanced functions after the "function assistant" provides enhanced functions.
增强功能穿透模块用于将用户选择启动的一个或多个增强功能作用于第三方应用中,即支持电子设备在使用第三方应用时调用电子设备的增强功能。具体的,增强功能穿透模块用于将调用的增强功能涉及到的参数发送至HAL层及内核层(kernel),使得HAL层及内核层(kernel)执行对应的操作,从而启用用户选择的增强功能。在本申请一些实施例中,电子设备调用的增强功能涉及到的参数可以被称为第一参数。增强功能穿透模块将用户选择启动的一个或多个增强功能作用于第三方应用之后,电子设备可以在该第三方应用提供的用户界面中呈现响应于用户选择的增强功能对应的效果,例如屏幕中人物图像的“美颜”、“美体”效果等。The enhanced function penetration module is used to apply one or more enhanced functions selected by the user to the third-party application, that is, support the electronic device to invoke the enhanced function of the electronic device when the third-party application is used. Specifically, the enhanced function penetration module is used to send the parameters related to the called enhanced function to the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel), so that the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) perform corresponding operations, thereby enabling the enhancement selected by the user Features. In some embodiments of the present application, the parameter involved in the enhanced function invoked by the electronic device may be referred to as the first parameter. After the enhanced function penetration module applies one or more enhanced functions selected by the user to the third-party application, the electronic device may present an effect corresponding to the enhanced function selected by the user in the user interface provided by the third-party application, such as a screen The "beauty" and "beauty" effects of the character images in the middle.
HAL层及内核层(kernel)用于响应于增强功能穿透模块调用的增强功能执行对应的操作。例如,电子设备可以调用HAL层的算法,从而启用该增强功能。又例如,电子设备可以调用对应的驱动,从而通过硬件设备(例如摄像头)启用该增强功能。示例性地,以视频通话场景为例,若用户选择启用电子设备提供的增强功能“虚化”功能,则电子设备可通过HAL层调用相机(camera)算法对拍摄到的本端用户的图像进行虚化处理;若用户选择启用电子设备提供的增强功能“防抖”功能,则电子设备可调用内核层(kernel)的相机(camera)驱动对拍摄到的本端用户的图像进行防抖处理。再示例性地,若用户选择启用电子设备提供的增强功能“色彩增强”功能,则电子设备可通过HAL层调用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD)算法对屏幕显示的图像进行色彩增强处理;若用户选择启用电子设备提供的增强功能“超分辨率成像”功能,则电子设备可通过HAL层调用图像超分算法对屏幕显示的图像进行像素超分处理。The HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) are used to perform corresponding operations in response to the enhanced functions invoked by the enhanced function penetration module. For example, the electronic device can call the algorithm of the HAL layer to enable the enhanced function. For another example, the electronic device can call the corresponding driver to enable the enhanced function through the hardware device (such as a camera). Exemplarily, taking a video call scene as an example, if the user chooses to enable the enhanced function "virtualization" provided by the electronic device, the electronic device can use the HAL layer to call the camera algorithm on the captured image of the local user. Blur processing; if the user chooses to enable the enhanced "anti-shake" function provided by the electronic device, the electronic device can call the camera driver of the kernel layer to perform anti-shake processing on the captured image of the local user. For another example, if the user chooses to enable the enhanced function "color enhancement" provided by the electronic device, the electronic device can call the liquid crystal display (LCD) algorithm through the HAL layer to perform color enhancement processing on the image displayed on the screen; If the user chooses to enable the enhanced function "super-resolution imaging" provided by the electronic device, the electronic device can call the image super-division algorithm through the HAL layer to perform pixel super-division processing on the image displayed on the screen.
HAL层及内核层(kernel)还用于将启用增强功能后发生的状态变化上报给应用层的第三方应用(例如微信(WeChat)、Skype等)。该状态变化包括各个增强功能的启动/关闭、增强功能的启用级别等。第三方应用接收到该状态变化后,可以为用户呈现各个增强功能的启动/关闭状态、增强功能的启用级别。例如,如图6E所示,若用户启用了“编码优化”功能,则电子设备可以更改控件609B的显示状态。The HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) are also used to report state changes that occur after the enhanced functions are enabled to third-party applications (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) in the application layer. The status change includes the activation/deactivation of each enhanced function, the activation level of the enhanced function, and so on. After receiving the status change, the third-party application can present the user with the activation/deactivation status of each enhanced function and the activation level of the enhanced function. For example, as shown in FIG. 6E, if the user enables the "coding optimization" function, the electronic device can change the display state of the control 609B.
在本申请实施例中,上述软件模块的数量不限于一个,可以为多个。例如,电子设备可以具有一个或多个增强功能穿透模块。在一些实施例中,电子设备可以配置有多个增强功能穿透模块,每个增强功能穿透模块对应于电子设备提供的一个增强功能,用于将该增强功能作用于第三方应用中。In the embodiment of the present application, the number of the above-mentioned software modules is not limited to one, and may be multiple. For example, the electronic device may have one or more enhanced function penetration modules. In some embodiments, the electronic device may be configured with multiple enhanced function penetration modules, and each enhanced function penetration module corresponds to an enhanced function provided by the electronic device for applying the enhanced function to third-party applications.
在本申请中,增强功能穿透模块也可以被称为增强功能接口。In this application, the enhanced function penetration module may also be referred to as an enhanced function interface.
需要说明的,图7所示的电子设备的功能架构仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,电子设备还可以包括更多或更少的软件模块,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the functional architecture of the electronic device shown in FIG. 7 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the electronic device may also include more or fewer software modules, which is not limited here.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备在如图7所示的软件结构的基础上,还可以包括包括显示模块,该显示模块用于根据各个软件模块的运行而显示对应的用户界面。该显示模块显示的用户界面可参照如图图4A-图4H、图5A-图5F、图6A-图6H实施例。该显示模块具体可以 实现为图1中的显示屏194。In the embodiment of the present application, on the basis of the software structure shown in FIG. 7, the electronic device may further include a display module, which is used to display a corresponding user interface according to the operation of each software module. The user interface displayed by the display module can refer to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 4A to 4H, 5A to 5F, and 6A to 6H. The display module can be specifically implemented as the display screen 194 in FIG. 1.
基于图7所示的功能架构图,下面以一个具体的例子说明本申请实施例提供的调用电子设备的增强功能的方法。图8示出了本申请实施例提供的调用电子设备的增强功能时涉及的数据流。该实施例的使用场景可以为图4A-图4H或图5A-图5F中的视频通话场景,在该使用场景中电子设备启用摄像头。Based on the functional architecture diagram shown in FIG. 7, the following uses a specific example to illustrate the method for invoking the enhanced function of the electronic device provided by the embodiment of the present application. Fig. 8 shows a data flow involved when invoking enhanced functions of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The use scenario of this embodiment may be the video call scenario in FIG. 4A-4H or FIG. 5A-5F, in which the electronic device activates the camera.
结合图7及图8,下面描述各个模块之间的对应关系。With reference to Figure 7 and Figure 8, the following describes the correspondence between the various modules.
图7中应用程序层对应于图8中应用程序层;The application layer in Figure 7 corresponds to the application layer in Figure 8;
图7中的应用程序接口对应于图8中的应用程序框架层;The application program interface in Fig. 7 corresponds to the application framework layer in Fig. 8;
图7中的增强功能匹配模块对应于图8中的系统服务(SystemServer);The enhanced function matching module in FIG. 7 corresponds to the system service (SystemServer) in FIG. 8;
图7中的增强功能穿透模块对应于相机功能服务扩展(CameraServiceExtra);The enhanced function penetration module in Figure 7 corresponds to the camera function service extension (CameraServiceExtra);
图7中的应用识别模块对应于图8中的系统服务(SystemServer);The application identification module in FIG. 7 corresponds to the system service (SystemServer) in FIG. 8;
图7中的场景识别及参数搜集模块对应于图8中的相机功能服务扩展(CameraServiceExtra)。The scene recognition and parameter collection module in FIG. 7 corresponds to the camera function service extension (CameraServiceExtra) in FIG. 8.
在一些实施例中,“功能助手”可以用于配置提供该视频通话场景的第三方应用使用所述电子设备的增强功能的权限。In some embodiments, the "function assistant" may be used to configure the third-party application that provides the video call scene to use the enhanced function of the electronic device.
首先,电子设备启动可提供视频通话场景的第三方应用(例如微信(WeChat)、Skype等),并基于该第三方应用打开视频通话界面,提供视频通话场景。参见第三方应用原始参数流,应用程序层的第三方应用会将原始参数流下发至HAL层及内核层(kernel)。这里,原始参数流包括第三方应用提供视频通话场景时涉及到的参数,例如相机参数(如分辨率、帧率、对焦模式、防抖模式)等。HAL层及内核层(kernel)接收到该参数后,可以执行对应的操作为用户提供视频通话场景。例如,内核层(kernel)接收到第三方应用的原始参数流后,可调用对应的驱动,通过硬件设备(例如摄像头)为用户提供视频通话场景。First, the electronic device starts a third-party application (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) that can provide a video call scene, and opens a video call interface based on the third-party application to provide a video call scene. Refer to the original parameter stream of the third-party application, the third-party application of the application layer will send the original parameter stream to the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel). Here, the original parameter stream includes parameters involved when a third-party application provides a video call scene, such as camera parameters (such as resolution, frame rate, focus mode, and anti-shake mode). After the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) receive the parameter, they can perform corresponding operations to provide the user with a video call scene. For example, after the kernel layer (kernel) receives the original parameter stream of the third-party application, it can call the corresponding driver to provide the user with a video call scene through a hardware device (such as a camera).
其次,在有第三方应用发起视频通话时,系统服务(SystemServer)可以发送通知至“功能助手”,该通知指示当前电子设备启动的第三方应用。该通知可以为广播。系统服务(SystemServer)发送通知至“功能助手”的数据流走向可参见图8中所示的白名单监听数据流。Second, when a third-party application initiates a video call, the system service (SystemServer) can send a notification to the "function assistant", and the notification indicates the third-party application that is currently activated by the electronic device. The notification can be broadcast. The data flow direction of the system service (SystemServer) sending notifications to the "function assistant" can be seen in the whitelist monitoring data flow shown in FIG. 8.
然后,“功能助手”确定当前发起视频通话的第三方应用是否有权限使用电子设备的增强功能。在一些实施例中,“功能助手”可以查看当前发起视频通话的第三方应用是否在“功能助手”白名单中,若是,则该第三方应用有权限使用电子设备的增强功能。这里,“功能助手”白名单可参考前文实施例的相关描述。如果当前发起视频通话的第三方应用有权限使用电子设备的增强功能,则“功能助手”可以为用户提供增强功能。这里,“功能助手”提供增强功能的方式可参考前文图4A-图4H实施例或者图5A-图5F实施例的相关描述。示例性地,电子设备可以在屏幕上显示如图4A所示的控件409,以供用户查看并调用或启用电子设备提供的增强功能。增强功能的确定方式可参照前文实施例的相关描述。Then, the "function assistant" determines whether the third-party application that currently initiates the video call has permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device. In some embodiments, the "function assistant" can check whether the third-party application that is currently initiating the video call is in the "function assistant" whitelist, and if so, the third-party application has permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device. Here, the "function assistant" whitelist can refer to the related description of the previous embodiment. If the third-party application that currently initiates the video call has permission to use the enhanced functions of the electronic device, the "function assistant" can provide the user with enhanced functions. Here, the manner in which the "function assistant" provides enhanced functions can refer to the related description of the embodiment in FIGS. 4A to 4H or the embodiment in FIGS. 5A to 5F. Exemplarily, the electronic device may display a control 409 as shown in FIG. 4A on the screen for the user to view and call or enable enhanced functions provided by the electronic device. For the determination method of the enhanced function, reference may be made to the related description of the foregoing embodiment.
在用户选择启用电子设备提供的增强功能之后,“功能助手”会将用户选择启用的增强功能所对应的参数下发至HAL层及内核层(kernel),HAL层及内核层(kernel)可以根据该增强功能对应的参数执行相应的操作,例如HAL层可以调用算法从而启动该增强功能,又例如内核层(kernel)可以调用驱动从而通过硬件设备(例如摄像头)启用该增强功能。HAL层 及内核层(kernel)根据该增强功能对应的参数执行相应的操作后,电子设备可以呈现启动该增强功能后的效果。After the user chooses to enable the enhanced functions provided by the electronic device, the "function assistant" will send the parameters corresponding to the enhanced functions that the user chooses to enable to the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel), and the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) can be based on The parameters corresponding to the enhanced function perform corresponding operations. For example, the HAL layer can call an algorithm to start the enhanced function, and for example, the kernel layer (kernel) can call a driver to enable the enhanced function through a hardware device (such as a camera). After the HAL layer and the kernel layer (kernel) perform corresponding operations according to the parameters corresponding to the enhanced function, the electronic device can present the effect of starting the enhanced function.
示例性地,以视频通话场景为例,若用户选择启用电子设备提供的增强功能“虚化”功能,则电子设备可通过HAL层调用相机(camera)算法对拍摄到的本端用户的图像进行虚化处理,并在显示屏上显示虚化处理后的本端用户的图像。又例如,若用户选择启用电子设备提供的“美颜”功能、“美体”功能,则电子设备可通过HAL层调用图像处理算法对拍摄到的本端用户的图像进行美颜或美体处理,使得屏幕显示的人物图像呈现“美颜”、“美体”效果等。这里,“功能助手”将用户选择启用的增强功能所对应的参数下发至内核层(kernel)的驱动的数据流走向可参见图8中所示的功能助手参数流。Exemplarily, taking a video call scene as an example, if the user chooses to enable the enhanced function "virtualization" provided by the electronic device, the electronic device can use the HAL layer to call the camera algorithm on the captured image of the local user. Blur processing, and display the blurred image of the local user on the screen. For another example, if the user chooses to enable the "beauty" function and "beauty" function provided by the electronic device, the electronic device can call the image processing algorithm through the HAL layer to perform beautification or body beautification on the captured image of the local user, so that The images of people displayed on the screen present "beauty" and "beauty" effects. Here, the "function assistant" sends the parameters corresponding to the enhanced function selected by the user to the driver of the kernel layer (kernel) for the data flow direction of the driver, please refer to the function assistant parameter flow shown in FIG. 8.
在内核层(kernel)的驱动接收到“功能助手”下发的参数之后,将根据该参数执行对应的操作后发生的状态变化上报给应用层的第三方应用(例如微信(WeChat)、Skype等)。该状态变化包括各个增强功能的启动/关闭、增强功能的启用级别等。第三方应用接收到该状态变化后,可以为用户呈现各个增强功能的启动/关闭状态、增强功能的启用级别。例如,如图6E所示,若用户启用了“编码优化”功能,则电子设备可以更改控件609B的显示状态。内核层(kernel)的驱动上报状态变化给应用层的第三方应用(例如微信(WeChat)、Skype等)的数据流走向可参见图8中所示的回调数据流。After the kernel layer (kernel) driver receives the parameters issued by the "function assistant", it will report the state changes that occur after the corresponding operations are executed according to the parameters to third-party applications (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) at the application layer ). The status change includes the activation/deactivation of each enhanced function, the activation level of the enhanced function, and so on. After receiving the status change, the third-party application can present the user with the activation/deactivation status of each enhanced function and the activation level of the enhanced function. For example, as shown in FIG. 6E, if the user enables the "coding optimization" function, the electronic device can change the display state of the control 609B. The driver of the kernel layer (kernel) reports state changes to the third-party applications (such as WeChat, Skype, etc.) of the application layer for the data flow trend of the data flow, which can be seen in the callback data flow shown in FIG. 8.
基于图7以及图8所示电子设备的功能结构,图9示出了第三方应用调用电子设备的增强功能时的方法流程图。这里,图9中虚线所示部分表示该模块为可选模块或者该步骤为可选步骤。图9中各个步骤的实现可参照图7及图8的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Based on the functional structure of the electronic device shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, FIG. 9 shows a flowchart of a method when a third-party application invokes an enhanced function of the electronic device. Here, the part shown by the dotted line in FIG. 9 indicates that the module is an optional module or the step is an optional step. The implementation of each step in FIG. 9 can refer to the related description of FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, which will not be repeated here.
上述实施例中所用,根据上下文,术语“当…时”可以被解释为意思是“如果…”或“在…后”或“响应于确定…”或“响应于检测到…”。类似地,根据上下文,短语“在确定…时”或“如果检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释为意思是“如果确定…”或“响应于确定…”或“在检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”。As used in the above embodiments, depending on the context, the term "when" can be interpreted as meaning "if..." or "after" or "in response to determining..." or "in response to detecting...". Similarly, depending on the context, the phrase "when determining..." or "if detected (statement or event)" can be interpreted as meaning "if determined..." or "in response to determining..." or "when detected (Condition or event stated)" or "in response to detection of (condition or event stated)".
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘)等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state hard disk).
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。A person of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the process in the above-mentioned embodiment method can be realized. The process can be completed by a computer program instructing relevant hardware. The program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. , May include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments. The aforementioned storage media include: ROM or random storage RAM, magnetic disks or optical discs and other media that can store program codes.

Claims (42)

  1. 一种使用电子设备的增强功能的方法,所述电子设备为第三方应用提供一个或多个增强功能接口,所述第三方应用为非第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,所述第一生产厂商为所述电子设备的生产商,所述方法包括:A method for using enhanced functions of an electronic device, the electronic device providing one or more enhanced function interfaces for a third-party application, the third-party application is an application program provided by a non-first manufacturer, and the first manufacturer For the manufacturer of the electronic device, the method includes:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,所述电子设备显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项,所述增强功能选项用于向所述第三方应用提供所述电子设备的增强功能;In response to the first operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a first user interface, the first user interface includes one or more enhanced function options, the enhanced function options are used to provide the third party The application provides enhanced functions of the electronic device;
    响应于在所述增强功能选项上的用户操作,所述电子设备通过所述增强功能接口为所述第三方应用提供所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能。In response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the electronic device provides the third-party application with an enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option through the enhanced function interface.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 1, wherein:
    对所述第三方应用的第一操作包括:用于开启所述第三方应用的操作,或者,用于在所述第三方应用提供的多个用户界面之间进行切换的操作。The first operation on the third-party application includes: an operation for starting the third-party application, or an operation for switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备显示第一用户界面之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further comprises:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,所述电子设备显示第二用户界面,所述第二用户界面包括增强功能控件;In response to the first operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a second user interface, and the second user interface includes enhanced function controls;
    响应于在所述增强功能控件上的用户操作,所述电子设备显示所述第一用户界面。In response to a user operation on the enhanced function control, the electronic device displays the first user interface.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the method further comprises:
    响应于在所述增强功能控件上的手势,所述电子设备在所述第二用户界面上显示用于隐藏所述增强功能控件的交互元素;所述手势包括长按手势、滑动手势、双击手势或重压手势;In response to the gesture on the enhanced function control, the electronic device displays an interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control on the second user interface; the gesture includes a long press gesture, a slide gesture, and a double tap gesture Or heavy pressure gesture;
    响应于在用于隐藏所述增强功能控件的交互元素上的用户操作,停止显示所述增强功能控件。In response to a user operation on the interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control, stop displaying the enhanced function control.
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备显示第一用户界面之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further comprises:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,所述电子设备显示第三用户界面;In response to the first operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a third user interface;
    响应于在所述第三用户界面的第一方向上的滑动手势,所述电子设备显示所述第一用户界面。In response to the sliding gesture in the first direction of the third user interface, the electronic device displays the first user interface.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the method further comprises:
    响应于在所述增强功能选项上的用户操作,所述电子设备在所述第一用户界面上显示所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能菜单,所述增强功能菜单用于调节所述电子设备为所述第三方应用提供的所述增强功能的级别。In response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the electronic device displays an enhanced function menu corresponding to the enhanced function option on the first user interface, and the enhanced function menu is used to adjust the electronic device to The level of the enhanced function provided by the third-party application.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个或多个增强功能选项所对应的增强功能,包括以下任意一项:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the enhanced function corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options includes any one of the following:
    所述电子设备具备的全部增强功能;All the enhanced functions of the electronic device;
    或者,or,
    所述电子设备具备的全部增强功能中,所述第三方应用能够使用的增强功能;Among all the enhanced functions that the electronic device has, the enhanced functions that the third-party application can use;
    或者,or,
    适用于所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景的增强功能;适用于所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景的增强功能包括:和所述使用场景对应的增强功能,或者,所述使用场景对应的增强功能中和所述电子设备当前已经提供的功能兼容的增强功能。The enhanced functions applicable to the use scenarios currently provided by the third-party application; the enhanced functions applicable to the use scenarios currently provided by the third-party application include: enhanced functions corresponding to the use scenarios, or corresponding to the use scenarios Among the enhanced functions of is compatible with the functions currently provided by the electronic device.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述一个或多个增强功能选项所对应的增强功能包括:适用于所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景的增强功能;The method according to claim 7, wherein the enhanced function corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options comprises: an enhanced function applicable to a use scenario currently provided by the third-party application;
    所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为视频通话场景,所述一个或多个增强功能选项对应的增强功能包括以下一项或多项:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能、“大光圈拍摄”功能或者“超广角拍摄”功能;The use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a video call scenario, and the enhanced functions corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options include one or more of the following: "beauty" function, "beauty" function, "blurring" ”Function, “large aperture shooting” function or “ultra wide-angle shooting” function;
    或者,or,
    所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为直播场景,所述一个或多个增强功能选项对应的增强功能包括以下一项或多项:“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能或者“美音”功能。The use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a live broadcast scenario, and the enhanced functions corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options include one or more of the following: "network acceleration" function, "coding optimization" function, or "Meiyin" Features.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备显示所述第一用户界面之前,所述方法还包括:8. The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further comprises:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,所述电子设备显示第四用户界面,所述第四用户界面包括提示信息和第一交互元素,所述提示信息用于提示用户:开启或关闭所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的方式,和/或,所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能前后的对比效果;In response to the first operation of the third-party application, the electronic device displays a fourth user interface. The fourth user interface includes prompt information and a first interaction element, and the prompt information is used to prompt the user: turn on or turn off The manner in which the third-party application uses the permission of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and/or the comparison effect before and after the third-party application uses the enhanced function provided by the electronic device;
    响应于在所述第一交互元素上的用户操作,所述电子设备显示所述第一用户界面。In response to a user operation on the first interactive element, the electronic device displays the first user interface.
  10. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,确定所述第三方应用具有使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的情况下,所述电子设备显示所述第一用户界面。The method according to any one of claims 1-9, wherein, in response to a first operation on the third-party application, it is determined that the third-party application has the right to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device In this case, the electronic device displays the first user interface.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 10, wherein:
    所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限,由所述电子设备默认开启;The permission of the third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device is enabled by the electronic device by default;
    或者,or,
    所述电子设备显示所述第一用户界面之前,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备显示第五用户界面,所述第五用户界面包括第二交互元素;响应于在所述第二交互元素上的用户操作,开启所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限。Before the electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the electronic device displays a fifth user interface, and the fifth user interface includes a second interaction element; The user operation on the above enables the third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
  12. 根据权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-11, wherein the method further comprises:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第二操作,所述电子设备显示第六用户界面,所述第六用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项;所述第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项不同于所述第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项。In response to the second operation on the third-party application, the electronic device displays a sixth user interface, the sixth user interface including one or more enhanced function options; one or more of the sixth user interface The enhanced function options are different from one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface.
  13. 根据权利要求1-12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备通过所述增强功能接口为所述第三方应用提供所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能,具体包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-12, wherein the electronic device provides the third-party application with the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option through the enhanced function interface, which specifically comprises:
    所述电子设备通过所述增强功能接口将第一参数下发至所述电子设备的硬件抽象层及内核层;The electronic device delivers the first parameter to the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device through the enhanced function interface;
    所述电子设备的硬件抽象层及内核层根据所述第一参数调用对应的算法和/或硬件设备,从而为所述第三方应用提供所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能。The hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device invoke the corresponding algorithm and/or hardware device according to the first parameter, so as to provide the third-party application with the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option.
  14. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括:应用程序层、应用程序接口、增强功能匹配模 块、一个或多个增强功能接口、硬件抽象层及内核层、显示模块,其中:An electronic device characterized by comprising: an application program layer, an application program interface, an enhanced function matching module, one or more enhanced function interfaces, a hardware abstraction layer and a kernel layer, and a display module, wherein:
    所述应用程序层包括:功能助手应用、一个或多个第三方应用;所述功能助手应用为第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,所述第三方应用为非所述第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,所述第一生产厂商为所述电子设备的生产商;The application layer includes: a functional assistant application, one or more third-party applications; the functional assistant application is an application provided by a first manufacturer, and the third-party application is an application not provided by the first manufacturer Program, the first manufacturer is a manufacturer of the electronic device;
    所述应用程序接口,用于所述第三方应用和所述硬件抽象层及内核层之间的通信;The application program interface is used for communication between the third-party application and the hardware abstraction layer and kernel layer;
    所述增强功能匹配模块,用于确定所述电子设备向当前运行的第三方应用提供的增强功能;The enhanced function matching module is used to determine the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the currently running third-party application;
    所述增强功能穿透模块,用于为当前运行的所述第三方应用提供所述电子设备的增强功能;The enhanced function penetration module is configured to provide the enhanced function of the electronic device for the currently running third-party application;
    所述硬件抽象层及内核层,用于调用算法和/或所述电子设备的硬件设备,从而启用所述电子设备的对应功能;The hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer are used to call algorithms and/or hardware devices of the electronic device to enable corresponding functions of the electronic device;
    所述显示模块,用于响应于对当前运行的所述第三方应用的第一操作而显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项,所述一个或多个增强功能选项对应于所述增强功能匹配模块确定的所述电子设备向当前运行的所述第三方应用提供的增强功能;其中,所述增强功能选项由所述功能助手应用提供。The display module is configured to display a first user interface in response to a first operation on the currently running third-party application, the first user interface including one or more enhanced function options, and the one or more The enhanced function option corresponds to the enhanced function provided by the electronic device to the currently running third-party application determined by the enhanced function matching module; wherein the enhanced function option is provided by the function assistant application.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的电子设备,其特征在于,对当前运行的所述第三方应用的第一操作包括:用于开启当前运行的所述第三方应用的操作,或者,用于在当前运行的所述第三方应用提供的多个用户界面之间进行切换的操作。The electronic device according to claim 14, wherein the first operation on the currently running third-party application comprises: an operation for starting the currently running third-party application, or an operation for starting the currently running third-party application The operation of switching between multiple user interfaces provided by the third-party application.
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to claim 14 or 15, wherein:
    所述显示模块,具体用于响应于对当前运行的所述第三方应用的第一操作而显示第二用户界面,所述第二用户界面包括增强功能控件;响应于在所述增强功能控件上的用户操作,显示所述第一用户界面;The display module is specifically configured to display a second user interface in response to a first operation on the currently running third-party application, the second user interface including an enhanced function control; User operation to display the first user interface;
    其中,所述增强功能控件由所述功能助手应用提供。Wherein, the enhanced function control is provided by the function assistant application.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to claim 16, wherein:
    所述显示模块,还用于响应于在所述增强功能控件上的手势,在所述第二用户界面上显示用于隐藏所述增强功能控件的交互元素,所述手势包括长按手势、滑动手势、双击手势或重压手势;响应于在用于隐藏所述增强功能控件的交互元素上的用户操作,停止显示所述增强功能控件。The display module is further configured to display an interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control on the second user interface in response to a gesture on the enhanced function control, and the gesture includes a long press gesture and a sliding Gesture, double-tap gesture or heavy pressing gesture; in response to a user operation on the interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control, stop displaying the enhanced function control.
  18. 根据权利要求14或15所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to claim 14 or 15, wherein:
    所述显示模块,具体用于响应于对当前运行的所述第三方应用的第一操作,显示第三用户界面;响应于在所述第三用户界面的第一方向上的滑动手势,显示所述第一用户界面。The display module is specifically configured to display a third user interface in response to a first operation on the currently running third-party application; and in response to a sliding gesture in the first direction of the third user interface, display all Describe the first user interface.
  19. 根据权利要求14-18任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 14-18, wherein:
    所述显示模块,还用于响应于在所述增强功能选项上的用户操作,在所述第一用户界面上显示和所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能菜单,所述增强功能菜单用于调节所述电子设备为所述第三方应用提供的所述增强功能的级别;The display module is further configured to display an enhanced function menu corresponding to the enhanced function option on the first user interface in response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, and the enhanced function menu is used to adjust The level of the enhanced function provided by the electronic device for the third-party application;
    其中,所述增强功能菜单由所述功能助手应用提供。Wherein, the enhanced function menu is provided by the function assistant application.
  20. 根据权利要求14-19任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 14-19, wherein:
    所述增强功能匹配模块具体用于,将所述电子设备具备的全部增强功能确定为向当前运行的所述第三方应用提供的增强功能;The enhanced function matching module is specifically configured to determine all the enhanced functions possessed by the electronic device as the enhanced functions provided to the currently running third-party application;
    或者,or,
    所述电子设备还包括应用识别模块,用于识别当前运行的所述第三方应用;所述增强功能匹配模块具体用于,将所述电子设备具备的全部增强功能中当前运行的所述第三方应用能够使用的增强功能确定为向当前运行的所述第三方应用提供的增强功能;The electronic device further includes an application identification module for identifying the currently running third-party application; the enhanced function matching module is specifically configured to use the currently running third-party application among all the enhanced functions of the electronic device The enhanced function that the application can use is determined as the enhanced function provided to the currently running third-party application;
    或者,or,
    所述电子设备还包括场景识别及参数搜集模块,用于识别启动的所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景,以及,所述电子设备当前已经提供的功能;所述增强功能匹配模块具体用于,将适用于所述使用场景的增强功能确定为向当前运行的所述第三方应用提供的增强功能;适用于所述使用场景的增强功能包括:和所述使用场景对应的增强功能,或者,所述使用场景对应的增强功能中和所述电子设备当前已经提供的功能兼容的增强功能。The electronic device further includes a scene recognition and parameter collection module, which is used to identify the use scene currently provided by the launched third-party application and the functions currently provided by the electronic device; the enhanced function matching module is specifically used for , Determining the enhanced function applicable to the usage scenario as an enhanced function provided to the currently running third-party application; the enhanced function applicable to the usage scenario includes: an enhanced function corresponding to the usage scenario, or, Among the enhanced functions corresponding to the usage scenario are enhanced functions compatible with functions currently provided by the electronic device.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备还包括场景识别及参数搜集模块,用于识别启动的所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景;The electronic device according to claim 20, wherein the electronic device further comprises a scene recognition and parameter collection module, configured to identify the use scene currently provided by the started third-party application;
    所述使用场景为视频通话场景,所述增强功能匹配模块确定的向当前运行的所述第三方应用提供的增强功能包括以下一项或多项:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能、“大光圈拍摄”功能或者“超广角拍摄”功能;The usage scenario is a video call scenario, and the enhanced function determined by the enhanced function matching module to provide the currently running third-party application includes one or more of the following: "beauty" function, "beauty" function, " "Blur" function, "Large aperture shooting" function or "Ultra wide-angle shooting" function;
    或者,or,
    所述使用场景为直播场景,所述增强功能匹配模块确定的向当前运行的所述第三方应用提供的增强功能包括以下一项或多项:“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能或者“美音”功能。The use scenario is a live broadcast scenario, and the enhanced function determined by the enhanced function matching module to provide the currently running third-party application includes one or more of the following: "network acceleration" function, "coding optimization" function or " American Voice" function.
  22. 根据权利要求14-21任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 14-21, wherein:
    所述显示模块,还用于响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,显示第四用户界面,所述第四用户界面包括提示信息和第一交互元素,所述提示信息用于提示用户:开启或关闭所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的方式,和/或,所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能前后的对比效果;响应于在所述第一交互元素上的用户操作,显示所述第一用户界面;The display module is further configured to display a fourth user interface in response to the first operation of the third-party application, where the fourth user interface includes prompt information and a first interaction element, and the prompt information is used to prompt the user : Opening or closing the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and/or the comparison effect before and after the third-party application uses the enhanced function provided by the electronic device; The user operation on the first interactive element, and the first user interface is displayed;
    其中,所述提示信息和所述第一交互元素由所述功能助手应用提供。Wherein, the prompt information and the first interaction element are provided by the function assistant application.
  23. 根据权利要求14-22任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 14-22, wherein:
    所述功能助手应用还用于确定当前运行的所述第三方应用是否具有使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限。The function assistant application is also used to determine whether the currently running third-party application has the authority to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to claim 23, wherein:
    当前运行的所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限,由所述电子设备默认开启;The permission of the currently running third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device is enabled by the electronic device by default;
    或者,or,
    所述应用程序层包括“设置”应用;所述显示模块还用于显示第五用户界面,所述第五用户界面包括第二交互元素,所述第二交互元素用于监听开启或关闭当前运行的所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限;所述第五用户界面由所述“设置”应用提供。The application layer includes a "settings" application; the display module is also used to display a fifth user interface, the fifth user interface includes a second interactive element, the second interactive element is used to monitor whether to turn on or off the current running The third-party application has the right to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device; the fifth user interface is provided by the "settings" application.
  25. 根据权利要求14-24任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 14-24, wherein:
    所述显示模块,还用于响应于对所述第三方应用的第二操作而显示第六用户界面;所述第六用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项;所述第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选 项不同于所述第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项;The display module is further configured to display a sixth user interface in response to a second operation of the third-party application; the sixth user interface includes one or more enhanced function options; in the sixth user interface One or more enhanced function options are different from one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface;
    其中,所述第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项由所述功能助手应用提供。Wherein, one or more enhanced function options in the sixth user interface are provided by the function assistant application.
  26. 根据权利要求14-25任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to any one of claims 14-25, wherein:
    所述增强功能接口具体用于,将第一参数下发至所述硬件抽象层及内核层,所述第一参数由所述功能助手应用设置;The enhanced function interface is specifically used to deliver the first parameter to the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer, and the first parameter is set by the function assistant application;
    所述硬件抽象层及内核层具体用于,根据所述第一参数调用对应的算法和/或硬件设备,从而为当前运行的所述第三方应用提供对应的增强功能。The hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer are specifically configured to invoke corresponding algorithms and/or hardware devices according to the first parameter, so as to provide corresponding enhanced functions for the currently running third-party application.
  27. 一种电子设备,所述电子设备为第三方应用提供一个或多个增强功能接口,所述第三方应用为非第一生产厂商提供的应用程序,所述第一生产厂商为所述电子设备的生产商,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器和显示屏;An electronic device that provides one or more enhanced function interfaces for a third-party application, the third-party application is an application program provided by a non-first manufacturer, and the first manufacturer is a user of the electronic device A manufacturer, characterized in that the electronic equipment includes: one or more processors, memories, and display screens;
    所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,所述一个或多个处理器调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The memory is coupled with the one or more processors, and the memory is used to store computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions, and the one or more processors invoke the computer instructions to cause the Electronic equipment execution:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,在所述显示屏上显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项,所述增强功能选项用于向所述第三方应用提供所述电子设备的增强功能;In response to the first operation on the third-party application, a first user interface is displayed on the display screen. The first user interface includes one or more enhanced function options, and the enhanced function options are used to provide Third-party applications provide enhanced functions of the electronic device;
    响应于在所述增强功能选项上的用户操作,通过所述增强功能接口为所述第三方应用提供所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能。In response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option is provided to the third-party application through the enhanced function interface.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的电子设备,其特征在于,对所述第三方应用的第一操作包括:用于开启所述第三方应用的操作,或者,用于在所述第三方应用提供的多个用户界面之间进行切换的操作。The electronic device according to claim 27, wherein the first operation on the third-party application comprises: an operation for opening the third-party application, or an operation for opening the third-party application The operation of switching between two user interfaces.
  29. 根据权利要求27或28所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The electronic device according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to invoke the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute:
    在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面之前,响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,在所述显示屏上显示第二用户界面,所述第二用户界面包括增强功能控件;Before displaying the first user interface on the display screen, in response to the first operation on the third-party application, display a second user interface on the display screen, the second user interface including enhanced function controls ;
    响应于在所述增强功能控件上的用户操作,在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面。In response to a user operation on the enhanced function control, the first user interface is displayed on the display screen.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The electronic device according to claim 29, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to invoke the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute:
    响应于在所述增强功能控件上的手势,在所述显示屏上显示用于隐藏所述增强功能控件的交互元素;所述手势包括长按手势、滑动手势、双击手势或重压手势;In response to a gesture on the enhanced function control, displaying an interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control on the display screen; the gesture includes a long press gesture, a sliding gesture, a double tap gesture, or a heavy pressure gesture;
    响应于在用于隐藏所述增强功能控件的交互元素上的用户操作,停止在所述显示屏上显示所述增强功能控件。In response to a user operation on the interactive element for hiding the enhanced function control, stop displaying the enhanced function control on the display screen.
  31. 根据权利要求27或28所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The electronic device according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to invoke the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute:
    在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面之前,响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,在所述显示屏上显示第三用户界面;Before displaying the first user interface on the display screen, in response to the first operation of the third-party application, displaying a third user interface on the display screen;
    响应于在所述第三用户界面的第一方向上的滑动手势,在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面。In response to the sliding gesture in the first direction of the third user interface, the first user interface is displayed on the display screen.
  32. 根据权利要求27-31任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The electronic device according to any one of claims 27-31, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to call the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute:
    响应于在所述增强功能选项上的用户操作,所述显示屏在所述第一用户界面上显示所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能菜单,所述增强功能菜单用于调节所述电子设备为所述第三方应用提供的所述增强功能的级别。In response to a user operation on the enhanced function option, the display screen displays an enhanced function menu corresponding to the enhanced function option on the first user interface, and the enhanced function menu is used to adjust the electronic device to The level of the enhanced function provided by the third-party application.
  33. 根据权利要求27-32任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个增强功能选项所对应的增强功能,包括以下任意一项:The electronic device according to any one of claims 27-32, wherein the enhanced function corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options includes any one of the following:
    所述电子设备具备的全部增强功能;All the enhanced functions of the electronic device;
    或者,or,
    所述电子设备具备的全部增强功能中,所述第三方应用能够使用的增强功能;Among all the enhanced functions that the electronic device has, the enhanced functions that the third-party application can use;
    或者,or,
    适用于所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景的增强功能;适用于所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景的增强功能包括:和所述使用场景对应的增强功能,或者,所述使用场景对应的增强功能中和所述电子设备当前已经提供的功能兼容的增强功能。The enhanced functions applicable to the use scenarios currently provided by the third-party application; the enhanced functions applicable to the use scenarios currently provided by the third-party application include: enhanced functions corresponding to the use scenarios, or corresponding to the use scenarios Among the enhanced functions of is compatible with the functions currently provided by the electronic device.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个增强功能选项所对应的增强功能包括:适用于所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景的增强功能;The electronic device according to claim 33, wherein the enhanced function corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options comprises: an enhanced function suitable for a use scenario currently provided by the third-party application;
    所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为视频通话场景,所述一个或多个增强功能选项对应的增强功能包括以下一项或多项:“美颜”功能、“美体”功能、“虚化”功能、“大光圈拍摄”功能或者“超广角拍摄”功能;The use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a video call scenario, and the enhanced functions corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options include one or more of the following: "beauty" function, "beauty" function, "blurring" ”Function, “large aperture shooting” function or “ultra wide-angle shooting” function;
    或者,or,
    所述第三方应用当前提供的使用场景为直播场景,所述一个或多个增强功能选项对应的增强功能包括以下一项或多项:“网络加速”功能、“编码优化”功能或者“美音”功能。The use scenario currently provided by the third-party application is a live broadcast scenario, and the enhanced functions corresponding to the one or more enhanced function options include one or more of the following: "network acceleration" function, "coding optimization" function, or "Meiyin" Features.
  35. 根据权利要求27-34任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The electronic device according to any one of claims 27-34, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to call the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute:
    在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面之前,响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,在所述显示屏上显示第四用户界面,所述第四用户界面包括提示信息和第一交互元素,所述提示信息用于提示用户:开启或关闭所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的方式,和/或,所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能前后的对比效果;Before the first user interface is displayed on the display screen, in response to the first operation of the third-party application, a fourth user interface is displayed on the display screen, the fourth user interface including prompt information and The first interactive element, the prompt information is used to prompt the user: to enable or disable the third-party application's permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, and/or, the third-party application uses the electronic device The contrast effect before and after the enhancement function provided;
    响应于在所述第一交互元素上的用户操作,在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面。In response to a user operation on the first interactive element, the first user interface is displayed on the display screen.
  36. 根据权利要求27-35任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个处理器具体用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The electronic device according to any one of claims 27-35, wherein the one or more processors are specifically configured to invoke the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第一操作,确定所述第三方应用具有使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限的情况下,在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面。In response to the first operation on the third-party application, in a case where it is determined that the third-party application has the permission to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device, the first user interface is displayed on the display screen.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的电子设备,其特征在于,The electronic device according to claim 36, wherein:
    所述第三方应用使用所述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限,由所述电子设备默认开启;The permission of the third-party application to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device is enabled by the electronic device by default;
    或者,or,
    在所述显示屏上显示所述第一用户界面之前,所述一个或多个处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:在所述显示屏上显示第五用户界面,所述第五用户界面包括第二交互元素;响应于在所述第二交互元素上的用户操作,开启所述第三方应用使用所 述电子设备提供的增强功能的权限。Before displaying the first user interface on the display screen, the one or more processors are further configured to invoke the computer instruction to cause the electronic device to execute: display a fifth user interface on the display screen The fifth user interface includes a second interaction element; in response to a user operation on the second interaction element, the third-party application is enabled to use the enhanced function provided by the electronic device.
  38. 根据权利要求27-37任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述一个或多个处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行:The electronic device according to any one of claims 27-37, wherein the one or more processors are further configured to call the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute:
    响应于对所述第三方应用的第二操作,在所述显示屏上显示第六用户界面,所述第六用户界面包括一个或多个增强功能选项;所述第六用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项不同于所述第一用户界面中的一个或多个增强功能选项。In response to the second operation on the third-party application, a sixth user interface is displayed on the display screen, and the sixth user interface includes one or more enhanced function options; one of the sixth user interfaces or The multiple enhanced function options are different from the one or more enhanced function options in the first user interface.
  39. 根据权利要求27-38任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,通过所述增强功能接口为所述第三方应用提供所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能,具体包括:The electronic device according to any one of claims 27-38, wherein providing the third-party application with the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option through the enhanced function interface specifically includes:
    通过所述增强功能接口将第一参数下发至所述电子设备的硬件抽象层及内核层;Delivering the first parameter to the hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device through the enhanced function interface;
    所述电子设备的硬件抽象层及内核层根据所述第一参数调用对应的算法和/或硬件设备,从而为所述第三方应用提供所述增强功能选项对应的增强功能。The hardware abstraction layer and the kernel layer of the electronic device invoke the corresponding algorithm and/or hardware device according to the first parameter, so as to provide the third-party application with the enhanced function corresponding to the enhanced function option.
  40. 一种芯片,所述芯片应用于电子设备,所述芯片包括一个或多个处理器,所述处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-13中任一项所述的方法。A chip that is applied to an electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processor is used to invoke computer instructions to make the electronic device execute the electronic device as claimed in any one of claims 1-13 Methods.
  41. 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-13中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product containing instructions, wherein when the computer program product runs on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-13.
  42. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,其特征在于,当所述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-13中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, comprising instructions, characterized in that when the instructions run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-13.
PCT/CN2020/084594 2019-04-19 2020-04-14 Method for using enhanced function of electronic device and related apparatus WO2020211735A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910319978.7A CN110113483B (en) 2019-04-19 2019-04-19 Method for using enhanced function of electronic equipment and related device
CN201910319978.7 2019-04-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020211735A1 true WO2020211735A1 (en) 2020-10-22

Family

ID=67485970

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/084594 WO2020211735A1 (en) 2019-04-19 2020-04-14 Method for using enhanced function of electronic device and related apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN110113483B (en)
WO (1) WO2020211735A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113284500A (en) * 2021-05-19 2021-08-20 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Audio processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN114500822A (en) * 2020-11-11 2022-05-13 华为技术有限公司 Method for controlling camera and electronic equipment
CN114697348A (en) * 2020-12-25 2022-07-01 华为终端有限公司 Distributed implementation method, distributed system, readable medium and electronic device
CN114840874A (en) * 2022-01-10 2022-08-02 华为技术有限公司 Application program management method and related device
CN115567630A (en) * 2022-01-06 2023-01-03 荣耀终端有限公司 Management method of electronic equipment, electronic equipment and readable storage medium

Families Citing this family (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110113483B (en) * 2019-04-19 2022-02-25 华为技术有限公司 Method for using enhanced function of electronic equipment and related device
CN110784592A (en) * 2019-09-29 2020-02-11 华为技术有限公司 Biological identification method and electronic equipment
CN110769096A (en) * 2019-10-21 2020-02-07 Oppo(重庆)智能科技有限公司 Motor vibration method, terminal and storage medium
CN110941821A (en) * 2019-12-09 2020-03-31 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Data processing method, device and storage medium
CN111062025B (en) * 2019-12-09 2022-03-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Application data processing method and related device
CN110990088B (en) * 2019-12-09 2023-08-11 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Data processing method and related equipment
CN111061524A (en) * 2019-12-09 2020-04-24 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Application data processing method and related device
CN111259441B (en) * 2020-01-14 2023-02-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Device control method, device, storage medium and electronic device
CN111338545A (en) 2020-02-24 2020-06-26 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 Image processing method, assembly, electronic device and storage medium
CN111314617B (en) 2020-03-17 2023-04-07 北京达佳互联信息技术有限公司 Video data processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN111246032B (en) 2020-03-27 2021-07-30 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Call management method and device
CN111565282A (en) * 2020-05-11 2020-08-21 Oppo(重庆)智能科技有限公司 Shooting control processing method, device, equipment and storage medium
CN112689086B (en) * 2020-12-10 2022-08-19 联想(北京)有限公司 Information determination method, electronic equipment and computer readable storage medium
CN115220828A (en) * 2021-04-19 2022-10-21 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Sidebar display method and device, terminal and storage medium
CN113220179A (en) * 2021-05-07 2021-08-06 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Sidebar display method and device, terminal and storage medium
CN113225429B (en) * 2021-05-19 2022-08-30 Tcl通讯(宁波)有限公司 Display effect optimization method and system and intelligent terminal
CN116708886A (en) * 2022-11-22 2023-09-05 荣耀终端有限公司 Video processing method, device and storage medium

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6993722B1 (en) * 1999-02-08 2006-01-31 Cirrus Logic, Inc. User interface system methods and computer program products for multi-function consumer entertainment appliances
US20080246733A1 (en) * 2007-04-04 2008-10-09 Henty David L TV interface control system and method with automatic text entry
CN109274575A (en) * 2018-08-08 2019-01-25 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Message method and device and electronic equipment
CN109313530A (en) * 2017-05-16 2019-02-05 苹果公司 Equipment, method and graphic user interface for carrying out navigating and interacting with control object between user interface
CN110113483A (en) * 2019-04-19 2019-08-09 华为技术有限公司 Use the powerful method of the increasing of electronic equipment and relevant apparatus

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9118967B2 (en) * 2012-08-17 2015-08-25 Jamdeo Technologies Ltd. Channel changer for intelligent television
EP3304288B1 (en) * 2015-05-27 2023-07-12 Google LLC Online marketplace of plugins for enhancing dialog systems
EP3346680B1 (en) * 2016-08-10 2021-04-28 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Notification message management method and terminal
CN109495688B (en) * 2018-12-26 2021-10-01 华为技术有限公司 Photographing preview method of electronic equipment, graphical user interface and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6993722B1 (en) * 1999-02-08 2006-01-31 Cirrus Logic, Inc. User interface system methods and computer program products for multi-function consumer entertainment appliances
US20080246733A1 (en) * 2007-04-04 2008-10-09 Henty David L TV interface control system and method with automatic text entry
CN109313530A (en) * 2017-05-16 2019-02-05 苹果公司 Equipment, method and graphic user interface for carrying out navigating and interacting with control object between user interface
CN109274575A (en) * 2018-08-08 2019-01-25 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Message method and device and electronic equipment
CN110113483A (en) * 2019-04-19 2019-08-09 华为技术有限公司 Use the powerful method of the increasing of electronic equipment and relevant apparatus

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114500822A (en) * 2020-11-11 2022-05-13 华为技术有限公司 Method for controlling camera and electronic equipment
CN114500822B (en) * 2020-11-11 2024-03-05 华为技术有限公司 Method for controlling camera and electronic equipment
CN114697348A (en) * 2020-12-25 2022-07-01 华为终端有限公司 Distributed implementation method, distributed system, readable medium and electronic device
CN114697348B (en) * 2020-12-25 2023-08-22 华为终端有限公司 Distributed implementation method, distributed system, readable medium and electronic device
CN113284500A (en) * 2021-05-19 2021-08-20 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Audio processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN113284500B (en) * 2021-05-19 2024-02-06 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Audio processing method, device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN115567630A (en) * 2022-01-06 2023-01-03 荣耀终端有限公司 Management method of electronic equipment, electronic equipment and readable storage medium
CN114840874A (en) * 2022-01-10 2022-08-02 华为技术有限公司 Application program management method and related device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110113483B (en) 2022-02-25
CN114666435B (en) 2023-03-28
CN110113483A (en) 2019-08-09
CN114666435A (en) 2022-06-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020211735A1 (en) Method for using enhanced function of electronic device and related apparatus
WO2021129326A1 (en) Screen display method and electronic device
WO2021017889A1 (en) Display method of video call appliced to electronic device and related apparatus
US20230046708A1 (en) Application Interface Interaction Method, Electronic Device, and Computer-Readable Storage Medium
WO2021000807A1 (en) Processing method and apparatus for waiting scenario in application
CN111046680B (en) Translation method and electronic equipment
WO2021036770A1 (en) Split-screen processing method and terminal device
WO2021036771A1 (en) Electronic device having foldable screen, and display method
WO2020155014A1 (en) Smart home device sharing system and method, and electronic device
WO2019072178A1 (en) Method for processing notification, and electronic device
EP4113415A1 (en) Service recommending method, electronic device, and system
EP4109891A1 (en) Device interaction method and electronic device
WO2022037726A1 (en) Split-screen display method and electronic device
WO2021036898A1 (en) Application activation method for apparatus having foldable screen, and related device
WO2020224447A1 (en) Method and system for adding smart home device to contacts
EP4002144A1 (en) File sharing method and device for mobile terminal
WO2022017393A1 (en) Display interaction system, display method, and device
US20230117194A1 (en) Communication Service Status Control Method, Terminal Device, and Readable Storage Medium
WO2022042326A1 (en) Display control method and related apparatus
EP4181498A1 (en) Photographing method and electronic device
CN113452945A (en) Method and device for sharing application interface, electronic equipment and readable storage medium
WO2021143391A1 (en) Video call-based screen sharing method and mobile device
WO2021042878A1 (en) Photography method and electronic device
WO2024045801A1 (en) Method for screenshotting, and electronic device, medium and program product
WO2020062304A1 (en) File transmission method and electronic device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20791400

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20791400

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1